M2406SMN

H
HP SONOS M2406A
Ultrasound Imaging System
Service Manual
M2406-90610
Printed in U.S.A. 4/97
H
Recycling plays an important role in conserving natural Copyright © 1997

resources and protecting our environment. Hewlett-Packard
Hewlett-Packard Company
encourages support of recycling efforts in your business and
community. Hewlett-Packards Imaging Systems division
makes every effort to produce print materials that use recy-
Printed in U.S.A. 4/97
cled/recyclable materials.
M2406-90610
Assembly
1 Introduction 2 Specifications 3 Service Data 3A Disassembly
4 RST 5 Error Codes 5 KRST Codes 5 ERST Codes
5 DRST Codes 5 Run Time Codes 6 Preventive

Maintenance 7 Cabling & Wiring
8 Parts Lists and

Exploded Views A Theory of Operation Index
Service Manual
HP SONOS M2406A
Ultrasound Imaging System
©Copyright Hewlett- Warranty WARNING
Packard Company 1997
The information contained
in this document is subject
Electrical Shock Hazard
All Rights Reserved.
to change without notice. Do not remove system
Reproduction, adaptation,
covers. To avoid electrical
or translation without prior Hewlett-Packard makes no
shock, use only supplied
written permission is warranty of any kind with
power cords and connect
prohibited, except as regard to this material, in-
only to properly grounded
allowed under the copyright cluded, but not limited to,
wall outlets.
laws. the implied warranties or
merchantability and fitness
Publication number for a particular purpose.

Explosion Hazard
M2406-90610 Hewlett-Packard shall not
Do not operate the system in
First edition, July 1994 be liable for errors con-
the presence of flammable
Second edition, Mar 1996 tained herein or for inciden-
anesthetics.
tal or consequential
Third edition April 1997
damages in connection with
Printed in USA
the furnishing, performance,
Safety Information
or use of this material.
Before you use the HP
SONOS Phased Array Imag-
ing System, be sure to pay
special attention to the
"Warnings" section at the
end of this guide. The warn-
ings explain the dangers of
electrical shock and explo-
sion hazard, the safety of ul-
trasound, applications,
guidelines for fetal use, and
guidelines for setting con-
trols that affect acoustic out-
put and accuracy of clinical
measurement.
Warning Symbols Used in

This Book
!
Instruction manual symbol:
the product will be marked
with this symbol when it is
necessary for the user to re-
fer to the instruction manual
in order to protect the prod-
uct against damage.
Indicates potential for elec-

trical shock
Hewlett-Packard
3000 Minuteman Road
Andover, Massachusetts 01810
(508) 687-1501
Contents
1 Introduction and General Information

About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Color Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Electronic Box (E-Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Physio Amplifier (see Figure 1-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Keyprocessor Electronics (Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Additional System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Preset Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Transmit Power (Acoustical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Explosive Hazards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Moving the Ultrasound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Detailed Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2 System Specifications
3 Service Data
About this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Repair Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Air Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Contents-1
Contents
E-Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Keyprocessor Electronics (Operator Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Main Power Supply (Tectrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Power Supply Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Imager Problems - Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

E-Box Voltage Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Transistor Voltage Test Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Power Line Voltage Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
E-Box Fan Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
System Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

.......................................................... 3-18
E-Box Switches - Scan Converter Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
E-Box Switches - Scanner Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Keyscanner (K1) PCB Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Flash Card Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Flash Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Flash Programming Visual Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Flash Programming Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Battery-Backed RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
TEE Transducer Thermistor Measurement Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Functional Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3A Assembly/Disassembly Procedures
Color Monitor Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1
Contents-2
Contents
Monitor Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1

Color Monitor Disassembly (12 inch monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-2
Monitor Disassembly/Reassembly (15 inch monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-4
Monitor Image Centering Adjustment
(12 and 15 inch monitors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-6
Monitor Tilt-Swivel (Twivel) Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-8

Twivel Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-8
Twivel Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-11
Twivel Friction Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-11
Circuit Breaker Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-12
Main Supply Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-14
Touch Screens Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-16
Cart Wheels and Brake Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-18

Rear Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-18
Front Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-19
Front Brake Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-20
4 RST - Description - Use

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
RST Menu Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
RST Definitions and Acronyms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Interface Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Menus - Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
List Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Option Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Command Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Progress Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Contents-3
Contents
Test Modes - Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Interactive RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Factory Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Stand Alone Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Basic and Extended Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Test Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Subsystem Extended Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Module and Submodule Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
User-Dependent Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Dot Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Dot Tests - Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Test Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Processor Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
RST Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Run Time Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Log Entry Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
CMOS RAM (Presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Touch Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Video Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Video Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Contents-4
Contents
Video I/O A to D test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Stripchart Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Equipment Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Network Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
5 Error Codes
Error Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Errors on LEDs during Stand Alone Basic Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5K KRST - Keyprocessor Electronics

Resident Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5K-1
5E ERST - Scanner Error Codes

Resident Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-1
5D DRST - Scan Converter Error Codes

Resident Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-1
5R Run Time Error Codes

Run Time Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5R-1
Contents-5
Contents
6 Preventive Maintenance
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
System Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Peripherals Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Safety & Performance Assurance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Performance Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Transducer Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Transesophageal Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Peripheral Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Recommended Frequency of Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Safety and Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Electrical Safety Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Test # 1. - Chassis to Ground Resistance Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Test # 2. - Ground Wire Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Test # 3. - ECG Patient Lead Leakage Current Test (Source). . . . . . . . 6-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Test # 4. - Patient Lead Leakage Current Test with Mains Voltage Applied
(Sink). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Transesophageal (TEE) Transducer Safety Testing.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Epiaortic Transducer Safety Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Transducer Leakage Current Test (Source). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Transducer Leakage Current Test with Mains Voltage applied (Sink) . 6-23
Contents-6
Contents
7 Wiring & Cabling

System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Internal E-Box Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
External E-Box Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Keyprocessor Electronics Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Primary Cart Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Power Trunk Cables Wiring Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
8 Parts Lists & Exploded Views

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Parts Ordering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
MCS Supplies & Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
SMO/PCE Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Transducer Exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Transducer Parts/Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
OEM Instrument Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Replaceable OEM Instrument Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
OEM Instrument Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
PC Board Allocation and Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Miscellaneous Parts-PCB Fuses, Battery, Etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
PCB Flash Card Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

I/O Panel/Keyprocessor Electronics Language Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Power Cord & Line Voltage/Circuit Breaker Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Replacement Parts & Exploded View Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Parts Locator Reference Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Contents-7
Contents
A Theory of Operation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Section 1 - Keyscanner Control Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Keyboard Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Keyscanner Board K1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Physio Board K2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Physio I/O Board K3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Main I/O Board K5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
System I/O Board K4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Section 2 - E-Box Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Scan Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Contents-8
Contents
Illustrations
Figure 1-1 M2406A System Configuration with Optional OEM

Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Figure 1-2 Physio Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1-3 Keyprocessor Electronics (Control Panel) Layout . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-4 EL Touch Screen Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 3-1 M2406A Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-2 Power Supply Rear Panel Test Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-3 Location of Voltage Test Points Inside the E-Box . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-4 Transistor Plate Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Figure 3-5 Voltage at Q1C Test Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Figure 3-6 Thermistor Resistance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Figure 3A-1 Color Monitor Removal from Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1
Figure 3A-2 12 inch Color Monitor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-3
Figure 3A-3 15 inch Color Monitor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-5
Figure 3A-4 Data Ray Color Monitor Image Centering

Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-7
Figure 3A-5 Twivel Assembly, Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-9
Contents-9
Contents
Figure 3A-6 Twivel Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-10
Figure 3A-7 Circuit Breaker Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-13
Figure 3A-8 Main Supply Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-15
Figure 3A-9 Touch Screen Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-17
Figure 4-1 RST Menu Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Figure 4-2 Submodule Test Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-5 Sample of Main Menu RST Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Figure 4-6 Sample Hardware ID Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-7 Sample RST Error Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Figure 4-8 Sample Run Time Error Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Figure 5-1 Error Code Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figure 6-1 TEE Transducer Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Figure 6-2 Electrical Safety Test Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Figure 6-3 Electrical Safety Testing - Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Contents-10
Contents
Figure 7-1 Cabling Diagram, External E-Box & Keyprocessor Electronics 7-6
Figure 7-2 Primary Line Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Figure 7-3 Trunk Cable Wiring Detail - Internal to E-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figure 7-4 Trunk Cable Wiring Detail - Front End (Scanner) . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Figure 7-5 Trunk Cable Wiring Detail - Back End (Scan

Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 8-1 PC Board Allocation,E-Box & Keyprocessor

Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Figure 8-2 PV Power Supply Board (A9) Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Figure 8-3 Keyprocessor Electronics Main I/O Board (K5),

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Figure 8-4 Transmit Power Supply Board (A8) Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Figure 8-5 Processor-Graphics Board (C1) Fuse, Battery, and

Flash Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Figure 8-6 Keyscanner (K1) Board Flash Card Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Figure 8-7 Digital Control Board (B14) Flash Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Figure 8-7a Scan Converter Motherboard System Type

Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Figure 8-8 Keyprocessor Electronics Assembly (K0) Exploded View . . . 8-35
Figure 8-9 E-Box Assembly (E0) Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Contents-11
Contents
Figure 8-10 E-Box Front Distribution Panel Assembly (E1) Exploded

View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Figure 8-11 Cart Top Assembly, Front (T0) Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Figure 8-12 Cart Top Assembly, Rear (T1) Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Figure 8-13 Cart Base Assembly (C0) Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Figure 8-14 Cart Body Assembly, Front (C1) Exploded View . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Figure 8-15 Cart Body Assembly, Rear (C2) Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Figure 8-16 Front Wheel & Brake Assembly Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
Figure 8-17 Model 21363A TEE Transducer Replacement Parts, Exploded

View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Figure 8-18 Model 2122XA Probe Wiring, Exploded View

Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Figure A-1 First Level Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Figure A-2 Control Hardware Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Contents-12
Contents
TABLES
Table 1-1 Peripherals Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Table 2-1 Power & Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Table 2-2 Main Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Table 2-3 Imaging Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Table 2-4 Separate Probe Doppler Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Table 2-5 Transesophageal (TEE) Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Table 2-6 Physios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Table 2-7 System Rear I/o Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Table 2-8 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Table 2-9 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Table 2-10 AQ Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Table 2-11 Peripheral Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Table 2-12 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-13 Regulatory Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-14 Safety Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 3-1 Test Voltages at Connector on Rear of Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Table 3-2 Scanner Power Distribution - All Voltages are DC

Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Contents-13
Contents
Table 3-3 Scan Converter Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3-4 Series Pass Regulator Assembly Test Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Table 3-5 Front Fan - Scan Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Table 3-6 Rear Fan - Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Table 3-7 Processor Graphics (C1) Board -Switch

Banks 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Table 3-8 Video I/O (C4) Board - 8 Bank DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Table 3-9 Scanner I/O (C14) Board - Toggle Switch - Fwd to Front of
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Table 3-10 TGC (B13) Board - Toggle Switch - Fwd Towards Front of
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Table 3-11 Digital Control (B14) Board - 8 Bank DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Table 3-12 Keyscanner (K1) Board - 8 Bank DIP Switch - Located at U222 top
of PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Table 3-13 Keyscanner (K1) Board - 8 Bank DIP Switch - Located at U411
bottom/right of PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Table 3-14 Keyscanner (K1) Board - 4 Bank DIP Switch - Located Next to
Flash Card Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Table 3-15 CCLR PCB -8 Bank DIP Switch - Located Bottom Left PCB . 3-23
Table 3-16 Scan Converter Motherboard - 77160-65030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Table 3-17 Flash Card Programming Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Contents-14
Contents
Table 4-1 Test Pattern Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Table 5-1 Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Table 6-1 Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Table 7-1 Internal E-Box Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Table 7-2 External E-Box Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Table 7-3 Keyprocessor Electronics Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Table 7-4 VCR Parallel Cable 77921-64040 Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Table 8-1 MCS Supplies & Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Table 8-2 Transducer Exchange Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 8-3 Transducer Parts/Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Table 8-4 OEM Peripheral Exchange Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Table 8-5 PC Board Listing with Exchange Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Table 8-6 PCB Fuses, Battery & Other Miscellaneous Parts . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Table 8-7 Language Option Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Table 8-8 Power Cord & Line Voltage/Circuit Breaker

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Contents-15
Contents
Table 8-9 Keyprocessor Electronics- K0, Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Table 8-10 E-Box Assembly-E0, Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Table 8-11 E-Box Front distribution Panel-E1, Replaceable Parts . . . . . . 8-41
Table 8-12 Cart Top Assembly Front View-T0, Replaceable

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Table 8-13 Cart Top assembly Rear View-T1, Replaceable

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Table 8-14 Cart Base Assembly-Co, Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Table 8-15 Cart Body Assembly Front View-C1, Replaceable Parts . . . . 8-59
Table 8-16 Cart Body Assembly Rear View-C2, Replaceable Parts . . . . . 8-65
Table 8-17 Front Wheel & Brake Assembly-W0, Replaceable Parts . . . . . 8-69
Contents-16
1 Introduction and General Information
About this Manual

This manual is intended to provide a level of information sufficient to
troubleshoot and service the M2406A (M2407A upgrade) line of Phased Array
Ultrasound Systems.
Product Overview
The HP Model M2406A Phased Array Ultrasound system, shown in Figure 1-1,
is the first of a new product family. Newly designed mechanical and
electronic system components, combined with an updated software
architecture, have achieved a flexible platform that is able to support a wide
range of product offerings.
Advantages of previous HP Phased Array Systems have been maintained

while state of the art components and peripherals have been added to greatly
improve the user interface and performance of the system.
Some of the outstanding features and benefits are listed below:
Separate monitor allows positioning for viewing independent of cart
Preset system settings, allows preferred settings at the touch of one button
Soft touch panels, backlighted keyboard and optimized dedicated controls

combine to facilitate user interface
Easy access to air filters for better maintenance
User friendly Resident Self Test
Wheel Lock system, foot operated
1-1
Introduction and General Information
About this Manual
Figure 1-1
Transducer Holder
Color Monitor
Optional Peripheral Keyprocessor

Elect ronics
includes:
-Touch Screen
(EL) Panels, and
-Keyboard Cont rols
Sys tem
On/Off Switch
Transducer Connection
Optional Peripherals
Plug into
AC Power
Source
Wheel Lock
M2406A System Configuration with Optional OEM Peripherals
1-2
System Description
System Description
The M2406A includes the following hardware components.
Cart
Standard RETMA (Rack Enclosure Telephone Manufacturers Association)
rack dimensions are 21 inches (61.2mm) in the vertical dimension and 25
inches (73mm) in depth. The base is manufactured from folded sheet steel
parts and provides the main support structure to which the spring mounted
wheels and casters are attached. The main power supply and isolation
transformer are enclosed within the base. Major ac components like the
isolation transformer and line filters, are attached in a fixed position towards
the rear of the base, while dc components are housed in a separate chassis
that can be pulled out for service or replacement.
Swivel wheels (8 inch) are located on the rear. Fixed wheels on the front may
be locked in tandem providing an added measure of convenience and safety
during system operation. Spring suspension on both fixed axle and swivel
casters allows 0.5 inch vertical wheel travel to allow for surface irregularities.
The wheel locks are designed to prevent rolling on a slope of 10 degrees or
less. All wheels have integrated sealed bearings for maintenance free
operation. The base includes a structural foot rest.
The cart top housing is cast of aluminum and incorporates the handle,
control panel and VCR housing. Integrally cast hinges are located along the
rear so that the top housing can be lifted for service access. Latch supports in
front, lock the top housing to the main cart during use. Special gas filled
struts (one on each side) provide the necessary counter force when raising
and lowering the main top housing.
Power Supply
The main power supply consists of a switching mode supply manufactured
by Tectrol. It resides in the lower section of the cart and delivers all working
dc levels to the main E-Box via integrated trunk cables. These cables are
routed directly to the E-Box. Necessary dc power for the Keyprocessor
Electronics section are routed from the power supply via an additional cable
and the I/O panels.
1-3
System Description
OEM peripherals associated with the system, including the main display
monitor, have integral power supplies which run on isolated ac provided by a
120V power strip mounted inside the right-rear corner post of the cart.
Peripherals requiring 220/230/240V run off another power strip mounted
inside the left-rear corner post of the cart (this strip is provided as an option
when required). Both power strips receive ac voltage from the isolation
transformer mounted in the base of the cart.
Testing of the power supply is possible by monitoring the outputs made

available on connector P1 at the rear panel of the supply. For details, consult
Chapter 3.
Color Monitor
The monitor is a 12-inch RGB color unit and repair is by exchange. Molded of
structural foam plastic, the housing is custom designed, allowing +/- 120
degrees swivel and +/- 10 degrees tilt. Vent holes along the top and bottom of
the sides and back minimize temperature rise without a fan. The monitor may
be removed from the system by disconnecting cables at the rear, pressing a
release lever below the front bezel, and pulling the unit forward.
Before transporting the system or raising the top housing for service,
WARNING
always check that the monitor is securely mounted in position.
Electronic Box (E-Box)

The Electronics Box, referred to as E-Box in this manual, is located
immediately below the hinged control/cart top housing. The E-Box combines
several functions in one enclosure and is the heart of the system. The E-Box
Scanner
enclosure is physically divided into two distinct sections; i.e. the
section and the Scan Converter section. The number of PC boards included
in each of these sections will vary depending on ordered and installed system
options.
The Scanner section directly interfaces the transducers to the system and
may be loaded with up to 29 plug-in boards, providing signal processing for
all modes including 2D, M-Mode and Doppler. The Scan Converter section
may have up to 16 boards and is directly responsible for extracting color flow
data, processing continuous loop review, AQ data and formatting video
signals.
1-4
Sys tem Descr iption
Figure 1-2
ECG
Heart
ECG Aux Resp Pulse Sound
1 2 3 4
Patient connection WARNING: Do not use ECG patient cables with detachable lead
electrically isolated wires that have exposed male pins. Electrocution
would result if these pins are plugged into AC power
300e003-JVM
Physio Amplifier
Physio Amplifier (see Figure 1-2)
In addition to a standard ECG module, other signals are available and may
include HeartSound, Respiration and Pulse. A headphone output is available
for real-time or pre-recorded audio. All physio waveforms are routed to
overlay the M-Mode or spectral data but may be positioned on a reserved
area above this data. In the 2D mode, ECG is displayed in the lower part of
the screen and may be summed with the heartsound signal.
Up to four externally generated Physio signals may be substituted by

appropriate connections to the front panel via standard 1/4 phone jacks.
It is also possible to input an auxiliary ECG waveform from an external
patient monitor and display it in all modes while using the R-wave as a time
reference for the system. Signal levels (high or low) are preset via the physio
setup screen. See the system M2406A System Basics manual for details.
Keyprocessor Electronics (Control Panel)

The Keyprocessor Electronics section (see Figure 1-3) at the top-front of the
cart houses the operator control panel, comprised of a backlighted computer
keyboard with function keys, slide pots, and rotary controls which provide
operator interface to the system. In addition to the keyboard controls, the
Keyprocessor Electronics section also includes two Electroluminescent (EL)
touch sensitive screens which add a programmable user interface to the
system. Operating software defines appropriate system response to a touch
at any given EL screen location.
1-5
Figure 1-3
Touch panels contain most

of the system controls.
Adjusts the volume for

the active mode or
peripheral. Mic
Volume
Press to change settings

specific to the active mode. Reset Test Setup
Imaging halts while in Patient Gain Compress Depth
Setup mode.
ID
LGC
Size Position Erase Tape
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - =
Trace Acquire
Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P [ ]
Cps ; Caliper Print

Lck A S D F G H J K L ‘
Press before starting an Shift Z X C V B N M , . / Shift
exam on a different patient. TGC

Enter Freeze
Alphanumeric keyboard
Image tuning controls
Measurement and
trackball controls
Hardcopy controls
Keyprocessor Electronics (Control Panel) Layout
Below the EL touch screens are the image tuning controls, keyboard and
hardcopy controls. Function keys, such as Setup , Position and Freeze , are
active when their light is on. Pressing these keys turns the light and the
function on or off.
1-6
Figure 1-4
Primary Panel
Contains imaging
mode controls
Controls shown here

depend on the high-
lighted control above.
Secondary Panel
Contains less
frequently used
controls
Each knob adjusts

the highlighted
control above it.
To change the value
displayed, turn the
knob.
EL Touch Screen Panels
Backlighting and EL panel intensity can be set through the user interface to
accommodate unique lighting environments. Five rotary encoders positioned
below each EL touch screen allow for many functional controls.
1-7
Additional System Components

In addition to the primary system modules, the following are also available.
Table 1-1 Peripherals Supported

Model Applicat ion Standard Opt ional Notes
NA ECG X
NA Respiration/Heart X Respiration = new feature
Sound / Pulse
77450A Digital Storage X Optical Disc
77450B Digital Storage X Optical Disc
77470A Digital Network X HP D3962A
Interface
77510A Strip Chart - B&W X Kowa TLR - 111
77530A Printer - Color - NTSC X Sony UP3000
77530B Printer - Color - NTSC X Sony UP1850MD-NTSC
77535A Printer - Color - PAL X Sony UP3000P
77535B Printer - Color - PAL X Sony UP1850EPM-PAL
77550A Printer - Color - NTSC Upgrade Sony UP5000
77550B Printer - Color - NTSC X Sony UP5200MD
77550C Printer - Color - NTSC X Sony UP5600MD
77555A Printer - Color - PAL X Sony UP5000P
77555C Printer - Color - PAL X Sony UP5600MDP
77560A Printer - B&W - NTSC X Sony UP 870
77560B Printer - B&W - X Sony UP 890
PAL/NTSC
77565A Printer - B&W - PAL X Sony UP 860 - Small format
77580A Printer - B&W - NTSC X Sony UP 910 - Large format
77585A Printer - B&W - PAL X Sony UP 910/P - Large format
1-8
Preset Functionalit y
Table 1-1 Peripherals Supported(Continued)

Model Applicat ion Standard Opt ional Notes
77612A VCR - SVHS - NTSC Upgrade. Panasonic - 7300

77613A VCR - SVHS - NTSC Upgrade Panasonic - 7350
77615A VCR-SVHS-NTSC X Panasonic-AG-MD830P
77622A VCR - SVHS - PAL Upgrade. Panasonic - 7330E
77623A VCR - SVHS - PAL Upgrade Panasonic - 7350E
77625A VCR-SVHS-PAL X Panasonic-AG-MD830E
Preset Functionality
Presets provide the capability to automatically adjust system variables
(including acoustic power) to pre-set values that have proven to provide the
best imaging results for a particular mode in the judgment of the operator.
This repeatability of settings can reduce the time to complete an exam.
Up to ten user determined presets in addition to HP default presets can be
retained by the system at one time.
A key on the top row of the left touch panel is dedicated to the preset
function.
For information regarding the use of presets or other mode / features of this
system, please refer to the M2406A System Basics manual.
1-9
Safet y Considerations
Safety Considerations
Transmit Power (Acoustical)
Acoustic output expressed as an Index is displayed on the screen to allow
the best possible diagnostic image with a minimal power output setting. In
order to accomplish this display in a meaningful way, a display standard is
adopted using one of four power Indexes listed below:
1 Mechanical Index (MI).
2 Thermal Index for Soft Tissue (TIS).
3 Thermal Index for Bone (TIB).
4 Thermal Index for Cranial Bone (TIC). (Index values are displayed on
screen in the form TIC: X.X in increments of 0.1.)
Which type of power Index is displayed on screen depends on the preset
type, imaging mode and the setting of the Index control in System Setup.
It is possible to select any of the four power Indexes for display at

NOTE any time using the Index control in the System Setup menu.
There are two controls that affect the 2D transmit power level:
❏ The dedicated gain knob.
❏ The Transmit Max setting in 2D setup.
Increasing the gain control increases the transmit power up to the limit set by
the Transmit Max control. In Color mode, the transmit power output is set by
the Transmit Max control in Color Setup. In PW and CW Doppler modes, the
transmit power output is controlled by the Transmit Max controls in PW and
CW Setup.
Transmit power is not affected by the COLOR GAIN (softkey)

setting.
For additional information on acoustical power settings and power Index,

consult the M2406A Safety and Standards Guide.
1-10
Explosive Hazards
Do not operate the system in the presence of flammable anesthetics. Doing
WARNING
so could lead to an explosion.
Moving the Ultrasound System

Be careful - never push the system from the rear - always push from
the front where you have more control over steering.
Although the system is designed to be mobile, remember that it weighs
approximately 515 pounds (234 kg.). Therefore, take the following
precautions whenever moving the system:
Ramps
Use two people to transport the ultrasound system when moving it up and
down ramps longer than 20 feet or steeper than 5 degrees. (Wheelchair ramps
are usually less than 5 degrees.) Avoid ramps that are steeper than 10 degrees
to eliminate the potential danger of the system tipping over. For more
information refer to the M2406A Safety and Standards Guide.
Transducers
Before transporting the system in a vehicle, remove all transducers from the
holders and receptacles. For safekeeping, place them in a packing box.
Transporting Vehicle/Lift Weight Handling Considerations
Be sure that the load capacity of a transporting vehicle or lift device can
handle the combined weight of the system(s) and passengers. A minimum
capacity of 750 pounds is recommended.
Loading and Unloading
Load and unload the ultrasound system when the transporting vehicle is
parked on a level surface. The weight of the system on the extended lift may
cause the transporting vehicle to tilt, which could cause personal injury or
system damage. Always use the wheel lock during transport.
1-11
1-12
2 System Specifications
Detailed Specifications
Table 2-1 Power & Weight
Nomenclature Specif icat ion
AC Input 100/120/220/230/240 Vac, +5-10%, 50/60 Hz.

AC Internal Isolated 120 Vac- Source all peripherals and dc switcher
via single NEMA strip.- Typical draw: 11.5A at 120Vac.
240 Vac Countries - Reverse IEC strip on right hand side -
Isolated 240V
Load 1500 VA
Heat Output 7000 Btus fully loaded
3rd Wire 500 microamps Max. at 240Vac. fully loaded
Leakage Measured average - 25 microamps at 120V
Environmental Temp range 0 to 55 degrees C. at 80% RH
(VCR & printers limit to 35 degrees C)
Dimensions Depth 38, width 24, height 57
Weight 515 Lbs. fully loaded (234 Kg)
Table 2-2 Main Display
Nomenclature Speci fication (1 2 inch) Specif ications (1 5 inch)
Screen Size 12 inch Diagonal - RGB Color Display 15 inch Diagonal - RGB Color Display
(Note: Actual video image size is 12
inches)
Raster Format 30 Hz. Interlaced, 512 X 480 Pixel resolu- Same
US tion (525 lines)
NTSC Color for VCR recording
2-1
System Specifications
Detai led Specif ications
Nomenclature Speci fication (1 2 inch) Specif ications (1 5 inch)
Raster Format 25 Hz. Interlaced, 512 X 512 Pixel resolu- Same

European tion (625 lines)
PAL Color for VCR Recording.
Features Tilt +/- 10 degrees, Swivel +/- 120 Same
degrees
Table 2-3 Imaging Transducers
HP Model No. Frequency Notes
21202A 2.5/2.0 MHz

21205C 3.5 MHz
21210B 5.0 MHz, Medium
21211B 5.0 MHz, Short
21215A 2.5/2.0 MHz with Dynamic Elevation Beam Forming
21242A 3.5/2.7 MHz, Long
21246A 5.0 MHz, Long
21253A 3.5 MHz, Curvilinear
21253B 3.5 MHz, curvilinear
21255A 4.5 MHz Linear
21255B 4.5/3.7 MHz Trapezoidal
21258A 7.5 MHz Linear
21258B 7.5/5.5 MHz Trapezoidal
2-2
21273A 5.0 MHz, Curvilinear

21275A 7.5/5.5 MHz, Linear
Table 2-4 Separate Probe Doppler Transducers
21221A 1.9 MHz, Doppler only CW only

21223A 5.0 MHz, Doppler only CW & PW
21228A 1.9 MHz, Transcranial Doppler (TCD) PW only
Table 2-5 Transesophageal (TEE) Transducers
21363A 5.0 MHz, Bi-plane, 2X48 element

21364A 5.0/3.7 MHz, Omni TEE, 64 element.
21365A 5.0 MHz, Mini TEE, 48 element.
21366A 7.5/5.5 MHz, Mini Bi-plane, 2X64 element
21367A 6.2/5.0 MHz, Omni II TEE
2-3
Table 2-6 Physios

Descript ion Specif icat ion
ECG 3 Patient leads with R-wave detection

Monitoring quality only
Freq. response, 0.35 to 70 Hz
Tolerance to dc offset, +/- 300mv. minimum
CMRR, 90dB, Defib protected
Gain, up to 8000 +/- 10%
Time to detect R wave from leads off condition < 8 sec
Respiration From ECG leads, 3dB bandwidth. Dc to 8 HZ
3 Ohms=5V p.p, 1.7Vp.p per 1 Ohm change
Heartsounds Filters 25/50/100/200/400/800 Hz
Pulse 3 dB bandwidth 0.15 to 150 Hz. +/- 20 %
Gain, 0 to 1300
Input Z, 1 Microfarad in series with 10 K Ohms
Aux 1 & 2 3 dB bandwidth, 1.8 kHz. Selectable inputs 0.025 to 2.5 Vpp
Aux 3 & 4 3 dB bandwidth, 1.8 KHz. Selectable inputs 0.025 to 2.5Vpp
Table 2-7 System Rear I/ O Ports
RGB/Sync Labeled BNC connectors, switchable to sync on green

Color Aux. NTSC or PAL Standards
B/W Aux. Labeled BNC, Composite Video, RS-170/CCIR
S-Video Aux. NTSC or PAL Standards, 4 pin mini circular DIN connec-
tor
Stereo Audio Spare stereo audio out, Line level, L&R on phono jacks
Aux.
2-4
ECG/R Wave Selected through user set-up, 3.5mm jack

Footswitch In parallel with control panel, Tape - Freeze - Print
Table 2-8 Audio
Speakers Stereo - VCR, Doppler, Physio output on both channels

Doppler Spectrum toward Xdcr - left speaker
Doppler Spectrum away from Xdcr - right speaker
Max power input: 15 Watts. Impedance: 8 Ohms.
Frq. Response 60 Hz to 15 KHz
Microphone Omni-directional sens. 10 Hz to 20 KHz condenser type.
Headphone Standard Phone Jack on Physio amp. Minimum load
Jack resistance is 8 Ohms. Shuts off speaker when head-
phone plug inserted
Table 2-9 Video
B&W Aux out RS170 (US), CCIR 472-1 (Europe)

1.0V p to p +/- 5% into 75 Ohms. Rear BNC
Color Aux out NTSC 3.58 (US), PAL 4.43 (Europe)
1.0V p to p +/-5% into 75 Ohms. Rear BNC
2-5
RGB and Sync Four BNCs, 0.7 or 1.0V p to p into 75 Ohms

out Sync, 0 to -1.0V. TTL Negative true
S-Video Aux out 4 pin mini-DIN NTSC or PAL
Luma level, 1.0 V p to p +/- 5% into 75 Ohm
Chroma level, 0.286 V p to p into 75 Ohms
Table 2-10 AQ Ports
AQ Out Analog, +/- 1Vpp, Low Z (37.5 Ohms), DC-1KHz

IF1 Out Analog, +/- 1Vpp, Low Z (75 Ohms), DC-7MHz
IF2 Out Analog, +/- 1Vpp, Low Z (75 Ohms), DC-7MHz
Control Out Diff. ECL compatible levels, 100 Ohm diff. termination
Table 2-11 Peripheral Control
Footswitch Rear Panel Connector for remote operation of Freeze,

Print and Tape. (For stress option: footswitch is labeled
Acquire, Accept, Border)
Each signal is a contact closure to ground, TTL compati-
ble, active low
2-6
Table 2-12 Power Supply
Line Voltage Nominal 120V, range 98 to 132 Vac rms

Line Frequency 47 to 63 Hz
DC Outputs 7 regulated (to within 50mv of nominal), 3 Unregulated
All outputs isolated from chassis.
Ripple On any reg. output: 50mv p to p or 0.5% of nominal volt-
age, whichever is greater
Power Fail PF signal to logical zero 10 msec. or greater before any
dc voltage drops more than 100 mv at ac power failure
Table 2-13 Regulatory Compliance
Item Specif icat ion
Regulatory FDA, French Homologation, JTA

Approvals
Languages English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
Standards UL-544, CSA, IEC 601-1, EN60601-1-2, AIUM/NEMA Out-
put Display Standard
Table 2-14 Safety Limits
Tes t Specif ication Notes
Grd. Wire Lkg. <30 ua,105Vac to 125Vac Consult Chapter 6 for

<270 ua, 231Vac to 252Vac other details
2-7
Tes t Specif ication Notes
Trans. Surface <41 degrees C. - Imaging Transthoracic

Temperature
Acoustic Power Consult Safety &
Standards Guide-
shipped with each
system
2-8
3 Service Data
About this Section
This Section contains practical data that may be useful when troubleshooting
the M2406A. Reference data, such as power supply test points and DIP switch
configuration settings have been grouped together in an effort to localize
information that is used often.
Refer to Chapter 4 for Resident Self Test (RST) troubleshooting procedures.

N O TE
Repair Philosophy
The approach to repairing this and other Hewlett Packard systems is dictated
by the complexity of the electronics and the surface mount technology used
in the manufacture of individual circuit boards.
Experience indicates that modular system design, with complete

interchangeability of circuit boards and other modules (without the need for
even trivial adjustments), provides the most cost-effective and practical
means of field repair. This modular field-exchange repair method minimizes
system down time and maintains the high standards of performance.
PC Board Exchange
The more complex PC boards in the system are typically field-exchanged

from a pool of lower-cost Exchange units; i.e. compatible boards that have
been refurbished and are readily available from the factory (see Chapter 8 for
Exchange unit part numbers). However, maintaining a readily available
inventory of Exchange units for the less complex PC boards loses its price
advantage, so Exchange units are not available for the less complex PC
boards - those boards have to be purchased new.
OEM Instrument Exchange
OEM instruments such as VCRs and Printers can also be field-exchanged

from an available pool of factory refurbished Exchange units. All OEM
Exchange units are refurbished and tested to meet manufacturers
specifications.
3-1
Service Data
Ser vice Tools
Service Tools
In addition to a set of basic hand tools, the following are recommended and
should be available when troubleshooting or servicing the M2406A:
Most hardware throughout the system has been transitioned to

CA U TI O N
metric standards, however where the fastener depends on OEM
components (example: the trackball), hardware is SAE (English
dimensioned thread). All Torx hardware is metric.
Long (10 to 12 in) Pozi drive screwdriver

Torx Screwdriver set: # 10, 15 & 25
Long screw/nut grabber or magnetic holder
Voltmeter (accuracy 1% or better)
Transducer test blocks (long = 77020-20010; short = 77020-20030)
Safety Analyzer
Anti-static wipe pad (for cleaning EL touch screen panels)
These additional items are often very helpful:
Ultrasound Phantom (ATS Model 539 or equivalent)

Spare System Cables
Full complement of substituting boards
Computer keyboard, monitor, and mouse
3-2
Service Data
Ser vice Access
Service Access
The following items are shown on Figure 3-1. For additional views of each
system assembly, refer to Chapter 8.
Air Filters
Two filters (for the E-Box air intakes) are accessible just below the front
handle of the cart, one on each side. Two more filters (for the power supply)
are accessible at the front of the cart, just below the front panel behind the
front foot/brake bar. Occasional wiping clean the air access holes for these
two power supply air filters is recommended. DSR also has a filter (5 total).
E-Box
The E-Box is accessible by raising the cart top assembly. Press the two
recessed latches, one on each side of the cart just below the Keyprocessor
Electronics, and raise the cart top assembly on its two rear corner hinges.
You can remove the top cover of the E-Box to expose the installed PC boards.
NEVER raise the cart top for access to the E-Box while a transducer
CA U TI O N
is still plugged-in at the front of the system. To do so may cause the
transducer cord to become caught on one of the modular components
at the front of the cart, resulting in unwanted strain or stress on the
transducer cord as the cart top is being lifted.
Power Supply
Located in the bottom of the cart, the entire power supply can be removed by
sliding it out from the front of the cart. The main power cord connections and
line filters are accessible by removing the terminal box (4 Torx screws) at the
rear of the cart, below the cart rear door.
Keyprocessor Electronics (Operator Control Panel)

Loosen the two 1/4 turn screws on the underside of the front handle (one on
each side). Then lift the Keyprocessor Electronics control panel upward,
pivoting the top of it toward you - use the service arm inside the rear panel of
the unit to hold the control panel in this open position. All control panel
components can be accessed while the system is energized. Plastic inserts
like the keyboard buttons may be pried up and lifted for easy cleaning.
3-3
Service Data
Ser vice Access
All M3 (T10 drive) & M4 (T15 drive) screws require a torque setting
of 10 in-lbs(1.2 N-m). Overtightening these screws during system
servicing could result in damaged screw-threads in the cart top
CA U T I ON casting.
Figure 3-1
Monitor mount
Recessed latches (2)
one on each side,
allow lifting upper
VCR Location enclosure to access
E-Box
Hinge - for
top housing
E-Box area 1/4 turn screws provide

(inside cart) access to Keyprocessor
Electronics components
Peripherals area
(inside cart) E-Box air intake
air filters (2),
one on each
side of cart
Main power supply
(inside cart)
Power supply
air filters (2)
slide out from
front of cart
Wipe air access holes beneath

power supply air filters clear of
dust and dirt
M2406A Service Access
3-4
Service Data
Main Power Suppl y (Tectrol)
Main Power Supply (Tectrol)
Power for the system is derived from a single power supply chassis that has
been engineered to provide seven (7) regulated and three (3) unregulated dc
outputs to meet the needs of the entire system.
Line voltage is delivered to the power supply chassis from the secondary of
the separately mounted isolation transformer via an integrated power cord.
Most repairs to the 77101-81030 power supply are limited to diagnosis and
complete exchange (exchange # 77101-68100). Replaceable parts are the fan
assembly (includes front panel) and the trunk cables.
Internal components to the supply include:
❏ Ac filter board assembly.*

❏ Active Power Factor Corrector board assembly. (PFC)*
❏ Switching regulator board assembly.*
❏ Linear follower board assembly.*
❏ Fan assembly (Part # 018-103814-4TEC).
❏ Scanner trunk cable assembly (Part # 77101-64310).
❏ Scan Converter trunk cable assembly (Part # 77101-64320).
* These components are not field replaceable. Opening the Tectrol

CA U TI O N
supply is dangerous because it contains large heat sinks which are
at line voltage.
If dc voltages measured on the rear connector of the supply differ

N O TE
from the data listed in Table 3-1 by more than the specified
tolerance, replace the supply.
3-5
Service Data
Power Supply Diagnostic Tests

Troubleshooting of system components including the main power supply is
often aided by the use of a safety analyzer.
As a first step in diagnosing a problem, it is suggested that you follow a

logical troubleshooting sequence as outlined in the following checklist:
1 Check line voltage.

Use a safety analyzer. Also check the line voltage from neutral to ground
and hot to ground. Make your measurements with peripherals turned off
and then again with a full load. Use the information and limits listed in the
specification tables of Chapter 2.
2 Check current load.

Again, check the main system and then add the peripherals one by one.
3 Check ground impedance and leakage.

Consult Safety Checks in chapter 6.
4 Check dc voltages at fuse blocks on Main I/O (C5) board in the

Keyprocessor Electronics (refer to Chapter 8 for location and
size of fuses).
Measure the voltage on both sides of the fuses to determine fuse integrity.
You will find several +/- 12V and + 5V mini-fuses feeding different areas of
the keyboard electronics, but a common line brings dc power from the
main power supply. This is the same supply that feeds the Scan Converter
side of the E-Box.
5 Check dc voltages at test points inside the E-Box, including the

transistor plate series pass regulators.
Follow the steps under the headings E-Box Voltage Test Points and
Transistor Voltage Test Points in the following pages. If it becomes obvi-
ous that the main power supply is defective, go directly to step 6.
6 Check the power supply voltage output (see Figure 3-2 and
Table 3-1). Check voltages at the test connector (MOLEX) with care. Use
the pin numbers and data supplied on the table. The test connector
shown in Figure 3-2 is located at the rear panel of the supply.
3-6
Service Data
The power supply must be connected to the E-Box in order to

CA U TI O N
perform the test.
Figure 3-2 Power Supply Rear Panel Test Connector
Pin 1
1 7
8 14
Finger Release
Table 3-1 Test Voltages at Connector on Rear of Supply
Nominal Low Voltage - Must be wi thin 200 mv to

14 pin Molex
pass test or as otherw ise speci fied in this column.
Pin 1 - 180 V Minimum

Pin 2 - 90 V Minimum
Pin 3 + 50 V Minimum
Pn 4 Main Ground - Isolated from chassis but tied to chas-

sis inside the E-Box.
Pn 5 + 12.1 V
Pin 6 + 9.0 V
Pin 7 - 12.1 V
Pin 8 N/C
Pn 9 - 5.3 V
continued on next page
3-7
Service Data
Table 3-1 Test Voltages at Connector on Rear of Supply (Continued)
Nominal Low Voltage - Must be wi thin 200 mv to

14 pin Molex
pass test or as otherw ise speci fied in this column.
Pin 10 Ground return for +5.1 V on pin 11.
Pn 11 + 5.1 V Scanner.
Pin 12 + 5.1 V Main Tolerance +450mV, -200mV.
Pin 13 Ground return for +5.1 V on pin 12.
Pin 14 - 15.2 V
3-8
Service Data
Imager Problems - Power
If the rear-most LED on the Transmit Power Supply board is constantly on,
one or more of the low voltage supplies is out of regulation. The Scanner and
Scan Converter boards can be removed one at a time to see if a problem in
one of them is causing an overloading of the supply.
E-Box Voltage Test Points

Check the test points with a voltmeter to see which supplies are out of
specification. Use the test point information which follows to check all
voltages in the E-Box.
Use the following test setup:
❏ Only one transducer connected and selected: 2.5MHz or 7.5 MHz.
❏ 2D mode (Doppler off, Color off).
❏ Depth set at maximum, System Transmit at maximum (Setup).
Before you begin, keep the following points in mind:

N O TE
Connect your voltmeter black lead to a good chassis ground.

Due to the high voltages available at the test points, exercise care
to assure the test probe does not short to another test point or com-
ponent on the board.
Test points Q1C and VH on the transmit power supply board
depend on the position of the control panel GAIN control.
PV Supply board test points VNNB & VNNA will have about -140V
if tested with a sector transducer (DIS-BIAS approx -132V).
All measurements are for troubleshooting purposes. If a voltage
level is suspect, check the voltage levels at the rear connector of the
main power supply as indicated in Table 3-1.
A problem with the Voltage levels on the Video I/O (Scan Con-
verter) will also be detected by the power supply diagnostic test
(refer to diagnostic test step 4 earlier in this Chapter).
3-9
Service Data
Figure 3-3
Coarse Delay Board

in the Scanner
(VBB) 3.5V 9V
Normally reads 8.3 to 8.5V
Bias Voltage developed on the Board. Voltage difference between
these two test points is normally approximately 5V.
Transmit Power Supply DRL = Drive Left, DRR = Drive Right

Board in the Scanner
AGND Q1C Vcc -5.2 +10 -13 VH DRL # # # DRR +3A

AGND
DRL NORMAL IS -13V
Q1C * SEE FIGURE 3-5
# NOT FIELD TEST POINTS
Vcc +5V
-5.2V -5.2V DRR NORMAL IS -13V
+10V +10V +3A +3V FROM +5V
-13V OUT FROM FET (DRAIN) VH -2.5 TO -140V
PV Power Supply
in the Scanner
GND VPP2 VDD VNNB VNNA PV-INT DIS-BIAS
NOTE : PV SUPPLY VOLTAGES GND

WILL ONLY BE PRESENT IF VPP 40 TO 46V
PV PROBE IS LOCKED IN PV-INT 4 TO 6V
VDD 9.8 TO 10.2V
VNNB -97 TO -109V DIS-BIAS -82 TO -131V
VNNA -97 TO -109V
Normal range - depends on transducer
Video I/O
in the Scan Converter
+12V
GND -12V -5V GND +5V
300e041
Location of Voltage Test Points Inside the E-Box
3-10
Service Data
Table 3-2 Scanner Power Distribution - All Voltages are DC Volts

Board +5 -5 +12 -15 +9 -13 +10 +7 +3 -VH -180 -90 +70
Main Supply S S S S S S S S
Transistor U S
Plate
Mother Board U U U U U U U S U U U U U
Distribution U U U
Front End U U U
Fine Delay U U U U U U
Coarse Delay U U
Transmit U U U U U U S S S U U U
PV Transmit U U U U U U U
Doppler Detec- U U U U
tor
TGC U U U U
Digital Control U U
Image Detec- U U U U
tor #1
Image Detec- U U U U
tor #2
KEY: S=Source, U=User
3-11
Service Data
Table 3-3 Scan Converter Power Distribution

Board Name +5 -5 +12 -12 -15 V (Batt)
Main Supply S S S S S
Motherboard U U U U U
Processor Graphics U U U S/ U, 3.5V.
B & W CLR U U U
Color CLR U U U
Video I/O U U U
PVT U U U
Stripchart U U U U
Image Memory U
R-Theta U
Flow Processor U
Doppler Processor U U U U
Scanner I/O U U U U
AQ U U U U
Front Fan U U
Rear Fan U U
DSR U
CCLR U U U
KEY: S=Source, U=User
3-12
Service Data
Transistor Voltage Test Points

The transistor plate located on the rear partition of the E-Box contains the
series pass regulators Q1 & Q2. These two components are in series so that if
one fails, the transmit high voltage will not be present.
The third component is a FET providing regulation for the -13V used
throughout the Scanner. Test point Q1C is the junction of Q1 collector and Q2
emitter. The voltage at this point is characterized by a stepping function and
is dependent on the control panel GAIN level control. The plate assembly
connects to the Scanner mother board via connector P23. The integrated
cable also interfaces with the Scanner fan board.
NOTE
To access the leads, remove the two top screws and lift up the plate.
Figure 3-4
FET
D
Q2
Black G B
Green/Yellow C
S Q1
Orange/Black
B
E
Orange
C
White
Brown TOP
E
White/Blue
White/Red
Orange/Grey
77
1
00
62
2
50
300e048
Transistor Plate Assembly
3-13
Service Data
Table 3-4 Series Pass Regulator Assembly Test Voltages

Easiest Gain Control Gain Control
Transistor Terminal Wire Color P23 Pin
Test Pt. at minimum at maximum
Q1 Emitter Orange/grey 3 VH on Xmit Power -1.8V -126V

Sup. PCB
Q1 Base White/Blue 1 -2.7V -127V
Q1 Collector White/Red 6 Collector -14.56V -161V

Q1
Q2 Emitter Brown 2 Collector -14.5V -161V

Q1
Q2 Base Orange 4 Q137, metal -14.3V -162V

Heatsink on
Xmit Pwr Sup.
Q2 Collector White 12 Q137, metal -14.0V -197V

Heatsink on
Xmit Pwr Sup.
FET Source Orange/Black 8 -14.7V NA
FET Gate Green/Yellow 7 -10.7V NA
FET Drain Black 9 -13V TP on Xmit -14V NA

Pwr Sup. PBC
NOTE
The information provided in the above table was obtained under the
following conditions:
❏ 21202A (2.5/2.0 MHz) transducer in either connector.
❏ Doppler off.
❏ Color off.
❏ 2D mode with sector on the screen.
❏ Resolve on
3-14
Service Data
Power Line Voltage Conversion
Figure 3-5
TP Q1C VOLTAGE AS A FUNCTION OF THE

GAIN CONTROL ON THE -155 TO -195V
FRONT PANEL
-60 TO -95V
MINIMUM SETTING (ccw) -15V ANALOG
300e038
Voltage at Q1C Test Point
NOTE
Two 2A plug-in fuses located on the Transmit Supply board protect
the high voltage supply. Check these fuses first in the event of
supply problems. The fuses are part number 2110-0684.
The PV Power Supply board is protected by two 0.5A fuses (part
number 2110-0716) located on the PV supply board itself.
Power Line Voltage Conversion
If it becomes necessary to power the system from a different line voltage

than the setting provided from the factory, refer to the Primary Line Wiring
diagram in Chapter 7 (Figure 7-2) and set appropriate jumpers as indicated.
An optional power terminal outlet strip is factory installed only in systems

manufactured for 220/240 VAC operation; this terminal strip must be added to
the inside of the left rear cart post whenever a 110/120 VAC system is being
field-upgraded to operate from a 220/240 VAC source.
3-15
Service Data
E-Box Fan Control Problems
The Imager Subsystem contains both the Scanner and the ScanConverter
functional sections of the system in a partitioned chassis. Each section has a
separate fan to keep the temperature of that section within reasonable limits.
Attached to each fan is a Fan Control board which functions to:
❏ Regulate the speed of the fan so that its cooling efficiency is balanced
against acceptable acoustical noise levels.
❏ Reduce the electrical noise coupled to the power supply lines by the fan.
An integral part of the fan control circuitry is the temperature sensors

located on the Processor/Graphics (C1) board, and the Image Detector #1
(A13) board. Both of these boards generates a dc Fan Control voltage
(FANCNTRL) that serves as input to the Fan Control board. Initially, the
control signal is summed on the Fan Control board with a start up signal to
insure a full 24V to the fan during power up. This overcomes initial inertia
and insures a smooth start up of the fan. After the fan is rotating, the start up
voltage is slowly reduced to the FANCNTRL signal, approximately +3.5V (see
Table 3-5).
The voltages shown below are typical as measured on the Fan Control board
NOTE connector.There is no significant difference in the voltage levels with
the plug connected or disconnected from the fan control board.
3-16
Service Data
Table 3-5 Front Fan - Scan Converter

Fancontrol V Ground Supply Supply
Orange wire Yellow wire Red wire Black wire
+3.5V max* 0V +12V -12V

+1.4V typical
Table 3-6 Rear Fan - Scanner

Fancontrol V Ground Supply Supply
Yellow wire Orange wire Brown wire Black wire
+3.5V max* 0V -15V +12V

+1.4V typical
* The fan control voltage depends on the speed of the fan at the time the
measurement is made.
NOTE
The rear fan makes use of the -15V supply while the front fan uses
the -12V. Therefore, if the -12V is not there, only the front fan will be
affected. The rear fan board cable is integrated to the Transistor
Plate Assembly.
A constant current source controls the current through the fan and ultimately
the voltage across it. The fan voltage is fed back through a large time
constant for comparison against the input voltage. This insures that
corrections are slow and do not generate rapidly varying current loads on the
power supply which could show up as noise on the image.
3-17
Service Data
System Switch Settings
Several boards throughout the system contain switches that determine video
format, options present or absent, and factory / field tests.
The tables that follow describe the location of these switches, and where
possible, the purpose or function of the switch. In some cases, the purpose is
purely to emulate a mode or field situation or for factory testing.
Switch positions listed in each table (open/closed, on/off, front/back) identify

the positions as labeled on the switch itself.
E-Box Switches - Scan Converter Section

E-Box Scan Converter section have switches:
Five boards in the
Processor Graphics (C1) Board - see Table 3-7

8 bank DIP switches 1-8
8 bank DIP switches 9-16 (to the right of above)
Video I/O (C4) Board - see Table 3-8

8 bank DIP switches 1-8
Scanner I/O (C14) Board - see Table 3-9

Toggle switch located on top of the board.
CCLR (C3) Board - see Table 3-15

8 bank DIP switches 1-8 on bottom left of board.
Scan Converter MotherBoard - see Table 3-16

2 position jumper switch near the center of the board labeled RAD/750V.
3-18
Service Data
Table 3-7 Processor Graphics (C1) Board -Switch Banks 1 & 2

Switch # Function Default position Comments
1 US/EUR Format ON for EUR. TV Standards
2 Kernel/Normal OFF Factory test
3-5 Not Used NA NA
6 Reserved, error OFF Factory test

DDOBD if set to
on
7 Reserved, flash OFF Factory mode/field mode

programing from Used to reprogram flash
external card. memory
8 Emulation OFF Operates board out of emula-

tion (factory only).
9 Not Used NA NA
10 Cache OFF (normal, Cache Disables/Enables Caching

enabled) (factory only)
11-16 Not Used N/A
NOTE
To clear the CMOS memory on the processor graphics board, there is
a jumper just to the right of the battery labeled CLR. Simply move
the jumper from pins 1 & 2 to pins 2 & 3 and the memory will
instantly be cleared. At software Revision B.0, the CMOS can be
cleared from the Other Tests & Utilities menu.
3-19
Service Data
Table 3-8 Video I/O (C4) Board - 8 Bank DIP Switch

1 Background CLOSED OPEN increases playback video

level on video background level (equivalent to
tape selecting grey under the IMAGE
menu on the left touch panel).
2 Loopback mode CLOSED Field/Factory loopback test
3 Color burst CLOSED
4 BW/Color CLOSED OPEN for B/W printers

camera port
5 RGB aux CLOSED

changed to
BETACAM
6 RGB aux CLOSED

changed to
Sync on green
7 RGBaux port CLOSED 1V p-p Vs. 0.7V p-p.

changed to 1V p-p = Closed; 0.7V p-p = Open
SMPTE std. Required for some peripherals.
i.e: Freeland.
8 RGB int port CLOSED

changed to
SMPTE std
Table 3-9 Scanner I/O (C14) Board - Toggle Switch - Fwd to Front of System
1 Clock function BACK Clock source, used to debug

Scan Converter without the
Scanner.
3-20
Service Data
E-Box Switches - Scanner Section

Two boards in the E-Box Scanner section have switches:
TGC (B13) Board - see Table 3-10
Toggle switch located on top of board
Digital Control (C14) Board - see Table 3-11

8 bank DIP switches located to the left of board
Table 3-10 TGC (B13) Board - Toggle Switch - Fwd Towards Front of System
Switch # Function Position Fwd/Bk Comments
1 TV Format Eur/US. TV Standards
Table 3-11 Digital Control (B14) Board - 8 Bank DIP Switch

Switch # Function Default Position Comments
1-3 Factory only OPEN
4 Flash programing OPEN Close for programing only.

from external card
5 Enables LED display OPEN Close only for troubleshoot-

ing and flash programming
(see NOTE below).
6-7 Unused NA
8 Reset for Scanner OPEN Close momentarily to reset

Scanner only.
NOTE
Switch 5 on the Digital Control (B14) board enables the LED
display located on the right hand side of the board. This switch
must be left in the OPEN (off) position for normal operation or
Doppler tones may be generated. If left CLOSED (on), the system
will not go into imaging mode.
3-21
Service Data
Keyscanner (K1) PCB Switches

The Keyscanner (K1) board inside the Keyprocessor Electronics includes the
switches listed in Tables 3-12 to 3-14.
Table 3-12 Keyscanner (K1) Board - 8 Bank DIP Switch - Located at U222 top of PCB
1 Unused OFF NA
2-3 Factory Only OFF Must be OFF
4 EL Frame Rate OFF OFF=70Hz,ON=60Hz
5 Data Line OFF 1 Data Line
6 Factory Mode OFF ON=Factory Mode
7-8 Unused OFF Unused
Table 3-13 Keyscanner (K1) Board - 8 Bank DIP Switch - Located at U411 bottom/right of PCB
1-8 Unused OFF NA
Table 3-14 Keyscanner (K1) Board - 4 Bank DIP Switch - Located Next to Flash Card Connector
Default
Switch # Function Comments
Position
1 Reset OFF ON=Reset
2 Kernal test OFF Factory only
3 Remap OFF Program Flash Memory (see Chapter 8)
4 Clock disable OFF Shuts off clock source on board,

Factory use only
3-22
Service Data
Table 3-15 CCLR PCB -8 Bank DIP Switch - Located Bottom Left PCB
Default
Position
1-5 Unused OFF OFF = Down position
6 128Meg/16Meg ON/OFF Controls SIMMS size
7 128Meg/16Meg ON/OFF 128Meg Switches 6,7,8 are ON.

16Meg, only switch 8 is ON.
8 16/128Meg ON This switch always ON.
Table 3-16 Scan Converter Motherboard - 77160-65030
Default
Position
1 Change System 750V On Rev B.0 & above boards only.

Type Jumper switch always in 750V position.
3-23
Service Data
Flash Card Programming
Some of the PC boards in the system have flash card connectors, providing
the capability to temporarily insert plug-in flash cards that are designed to
reprogram the system. The flash cards provide a quick and convenient means
for entering software fixes, software changes, software upgrades, installation
of future options, etc.
Use the following procedure to perform flash card programming of the

system.
Flash Programming Procedure

Flash card programming should be performed on only one section of the
system at a time:
- Keyprocessor Electronics - program via the Keyscanner/Audio (K1) PCB.
- Scanner section - program via the Digital Control (B14) PCB.
- Scan Converter section - program via the Processor Graphics (C1) PCB.
1 Plug the flash card into the flash card connector on the PCB you want to
program. The following PC boards have a flash card connector:
- Keyscanner/Audio (K1) PCB - see Figure 8-6.
- Digital Control (B14) PCB - see Figure 8-7.
- Processor Graphics (C1) PCB - see Figure 8-5.
2 Set the flash programming DIP switch(es) only on the board being pro-
grammed :
- Keyscanner/Audio (K1) PCB - switch 3 in the 4-bank switch ON.
- Digital Control (B14) PCB - switches 4 and 5 CLOSED.
- Processor Graphics (C1) PCB - switch 7 in the left 8-bank switch UP.
3 Power-up the M2406A and/or press RESET at the system control panel.
This initiates automatic programming of the board that has been setup in
steps 1 and 2 above. During programming, the 4-digit LED display on the
board provides specific indications as described in the following para-
graphs. After the LED display verifies that programming was completed
successfully, remove the flash card from the board.
3-24
Service Data
Beginning with Revision B.0, two flash cards will be required to

NOTE program the system. One card programs one portion of the system
and the second card programs another portion of the system. The
cards are labeled appropriately. (If you use the wrong flash card,
the error code CRD will appear on the circuit board LEDS.)
Flash Programming Visual Indications

After initiating flash programming of any PCB, the following four-stage
process occurs automatically:
Stage 1, Erase PCB Memory

First, on-board memory is erased. The 4-digit LED display on the PC board
being programmed displays ERAS while the erase operation is underway.
Stage 2, Program PCB Memory

Next, on-board memory is programmed. The 4-digit LED display on the PC
board being programmed displays PROG while the programming operation
is underway. This is the longest stage of the three-stage procedure, and the
programming time is dependent on the size of the load data in the flash card.
Currently, programming time is as follows for each PCB (these times are sub-
ject to future change):
- Keyscanner/Audio (K1) PCB - approximately 30 seconds.
- Digital Control (B14) PCB - approximately 30 seconds.
- Processor Graphics (C1) PCB - approximately 2 minutes.
Stage 3, Verify Programming
Last, on-board flash memory is compared word-for-word with the flash cards
load data. The 4-digit LED display on the PC board being compared displays
VERI while the comparison operation is underway.
Stage 4, Indicate Success/Failure

After the comparison of programmed PCB memory to flash card load data is
completed, the 4-digit LED display displays OK!! indicating that the proce-
dure was successful. If programming was not successful, one of the error
messages described in the following paragraphs will be displayed by the
LEDs.
3-25
Ser vice Data
The OK!! or error indication displayed by the LEDs remains present

N O TE
until the system is RESET. This allows the programmer to keep
important information available until the programming procedure
is completed.
Flash Programming Error Codes

Table 3-17 lists error messages that might be displayed by the 4-digit LEDs on
the PCB during stage 4 of the flash programming procedure, if programming
was not completed successfully.
.
Table 3-17 Flash Card Programming Error Codes
Displayed
Description
Code
-VFY The verify test failed. Check flash card or PCB that flash card is plugged into.
-ETO The erase operation timed out. Check flash card or PCB that flash card is
plugged into.
-VPP The voltage was too low for successful programming. Check flash card or
PCB that flash card is plugged into.
-SEQ A sequence error occur red during the attempted erase. Check flash card or
PCB that flash card is plugged into.
-ERA The flash memory failed to erase. Check flash card or PCB that flash card is
plugged into.
-WTO The write (programming) operation timed out. Check flash card or PCB that
flash card is plugged into.
-WRI The write (programming) operation failed. Check flash card or PCB that flash
card is plugged into.
-SIZ Either the code size to be programmed exceeds the size of the on-board flash
memory, or the flash card is plugged into a subs ystem for which it has not load
to program. Check flash card or PCB that flash card is plugged into.
-SWC Switch settings are incorrect for the attempted flash update. Check the switch
set tings as defined in step 2 of the flash programming procedure.
-CRD The wrong flash card was used to program this circuit board (B.0 or greater).
3-26
Ser vice Data
Battery-Backed RAM
Battery-Backed RAM
The operator clears battery-backed RAM through the Other Tests and
Utilities screen:
Main Menu / Other Tests & Utilities / Clear Bat-Backed RAM
The Clear Bat-Backed RAM operation resets the nonvolatile system memory
providing a mechanism to correct problems caused by erroneous values in
this memory region. This operation resets custom presets and system error
logs to their factory values. Clear Battery Backed RAM operation must
be confirmed before it is executed because it will erase the
customers presets.
3-27
Ser vice Data
TEE Transducer Thermistor Measurement Check
The function of the thermistor, located at the distal tip of the transesophageal
transducer, is to monitor the temperature rise at the site where power is
dissipated and where a potential for burns exits. If the temperature threshold
is reached, the scanner will stop delivering power to the transducer, thereby
preventing a possible burn.
The thermistor has a negative temperature coefficient; that is, as the
temperature increases, the resistance measured across the thermistor
decreases. For each of the various TEE probes (21263A/21364A/21365A/
21366A), the measurements are made between pins 1 and 2, 1 and 18, or both
sets depending on the type of transducer. Please refer to the following chart
for specific test points. Measurements are made at room temperature in air.
Please note that these are approximate values since room
temperature will vary. In general, regardless of transducer, the room
temperature range of values should be between 2.6K and 3.4K ohms.
Defective thermistors will typically be considerably out of that range.
Resistance (K
Transducer Model Connector Pin #
Ohms)
21363A Horizontal:* 1 - 2 2.6 - 3.4
1 -18 OPEN
Vertical: 1 - 2 OPEN
1 - 18 2.6 - 3.4
21364A 1 - 2 2.9 - 3.4
1 - 18 2.2 (Fixed)
21365A 1 - 2 2.6 - 3.4
1 - 18 2.2 (Fixed)
21366A Horizontal:* 1 - 2 2.4 - 3.6
1 - 18 OPEN
Vertical: 1 - 2 OPEN
1 - 18 2.4 - 3.6
21367A 1 - 2 2.4 - 2.8
1 - 18 2.2 (Fixed)
NOTE *Measurements between pins 1 & 18 on bi-plane transducers are made on the
vertical connector. Measurements between pins 1 & 2 are made on the
horizontal connector. All measurements are made in Kilo-ohms.
3-28
Ser vice Data
Figure 3-6
TEE PROBE THERMISTOR CHECK
BI-PLANE ONLY
VERTICAL CONNECTOR
RESISTANCE
Ohmeter
Pin #2
Ohmeter
Pin #1
PIN #18
IS THERM. #2
TWO TOP PINS

ON THIS BLOCK
VIEWED FROM CONTACTS SIDE
1011e019
Thermistor Resistance Measurement
When measuring the thermistor resistance, allow the tip of the

N O TE
transducer to hang freely away from any temperature absorbing
material such as a desk or bench top.
The Bi-Plane Transducer has two thermistor elements. Pins 1 and 2

in the figure above are thermistor #1 (Horizontal connector). Pins 1
and 18 of the vertical connector correspond to thermistor #2. The
21363A does not require an adapter.
3-29
Ser vice Data
Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-7 shows a functional block diagram of the SONOS M2406A system.
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
3-30
Ser vice Data
Figure 3-7
SONOS M2406A
3-31
Ser vice Data
3-32
3A Assembly/Disassembly Procedures
Color Monitor Servicing

The Color Monitor is a critical component of the system and precise
adjustments have been made at the factory. These adjustments cannot be
duplicated in the field and therefore field service procedures are very limited
in scope. In most cases, the preferred service method is exchange.
Monitor Removal
Disconnect all cables from the rear of the monitor.
To slide the monitor off the swivel base, locate the release bar under the
center of the screen. Push it upwards to release the monitor. Pull the monitor
forward and upwards to lift it out of the way.
Figure 3A-1
207e075a
Color Monitor Removal from Base
3A-1
Assembly/Disassembly Procedures
Color Monitor Disassembly (12 inch monitor)

Color Monitor disassembly requires the use of T10 and T15 Torx
screwdrivers.
For purposes of image adjustment, only the monitor cover needs to

N O TE
be removed! (steps 2-5)
1 Remove the monitor from the system as described earlier in this Chapter.
Place the monitor on the workbench face down, being careful not to
scratch or damage the CRT.
2 Loosen the two captive screws at the rear of the monitor cover.
3 Wedge a large flat blade screwdriver between the rear bottom of the
cover and the plastic base piece.
4 With a small screwdriver push in on the plastic tabs that secure the top of
the bezel to the cover; the tabs are accessible through the vent slots, as
shown in Figure 3A-2).
5 Once the cover is released on both sides, use the wedged flat blade screw-
driver to lift the cover up and away from the monitor.
6 Position the monitor on the bench with its screen facing up. Remove the
two screws that secure the bezel to the bottom plate.
7 Press the top of the spring loaded metal tabs on each side of the bezel to
release it and lift it out of the way.
8 Turn the monitor on the bench so that the bottom is up. Remove the four
screws that secure the bottom plate and lift the plate.
9 Disconnect the two connectors from the small control board and lift the
bottom assembly out of the way.
If the Brightness/Contrast board is replaced, make sure the

N O TE
insulator is re-mounted using tie wraps 1400-0249
3A-2
Figure 3A-2
PUSH IN THROUGH
VENT SLOT TO
RELEASE COVER
LOOSEN 2 SCREWS AND
WEDGE FLAT BLADE
BETWEEN COVER AND
BOTTOM PLATE TO
HELP REMOVE COVER
PUSH THIS TAB

TO RELEASE BEZEL
300e047
12 inch Color Monitor Disassembly
3A-3
Monitor Disassembly/Reassembly (15 inch monitor)
NOTE For image adjustment, only the monitor cover must be removed (steps 1-3).
In any situation, never disassemble the monitor further than described by the
following steps. Refer to the monitor exploded view diagram in Figure 3A-3
for reference.
1 Using a pencil, mark the settings of the monitor brightness and contrast
control knobs, by drawing an arrow on each knob that extends to the
detent line printed below each knob on the front bezel. This will help
you reset the knobs to the customers settings when the monitor is reas-
sembled.
2 Remove the monitor from the system as described earlier in this section.
Place it face down on a soft surface to prevent scratching or damaging
the monitor glass.
3 Using a long #1 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the four screws at the back of
the monitor that secure the plastic case to front bezel. Lift off the plastic
case and turn it upside down to let the 4 screws fall out of their respective
holes.
4 Unscrew the 4 bezel clamp screws that secure the front bezel to the mon-
itor assembly. (Loosen these screws until the clamps release from their
white shock mounts.)
5 Remove the 4 bezel clamps and lift the monitor assembly off its front
bezel. If replacing the bezel, remove the 4 white bezel shock mounts from
the old bezel and install them on the new bezel.
6 To reassemble the monitor, reverse the above procedures. Be sure to set

the brightness and contrast knobs to the customers original position.
Also be sure that the color temperature switch on the back of the monitor
is set to position #2.
3A-4
Figure 3A-3
6ajl072
15 inch Color Monitor Disassembly
3A-5
Monitor Image Centering Adjustment

(12 and 15 inch monitors)
The image displayed by the Color Monitor can be adjusted to center it in the
screen. Before attempting this image centering adjustment, make note of the
following:
You do not have to remove the monitor from the system to perform
this adjustment; leave the monitor in its operating position
Limit your adjustment to the controls described below;

DO NOT attempt to adjust any other monitor controls in the field!
Always use an insulated screwdriver or tuning tool
Warm up the monitor for a minimum of 30 minutes before starting

the adjustment
HIGH VOLTAGE! When the system is powered-up, 500-800 Vdc are

CA U TI O N
present at exposed heat sinks on the main PCB in the Data Ray
monitor (the PCB mounted on the left side when looking at the
screen where the adjustments are located).
Image Adjustment Procedure
1 Remove the cover from the monitor as described earlier in this Chapter.
2 Power-up the system and press the TEST button at the system control
panel. Display the White Rectangle test pattern by choosing the follow-
ing selections from the test menus that are subsequently displayed:
- Other Tests & Utilities
- Test Patterns
- White Rectangle
3 Adjust the V CENT (VERTICAL CENTERING) and H1 CENT (HORIZON-

TAL PHASE 1 CENTERING) adjustments shown in Figure 3A-4, until the
displayed test pattern is centered inside the bezel when viewed from a
height even with the top of the monitor at a distance of 3 feet.
For 50 HZ systems, use H2 CENT (HORIZONTAL PHASE 2) instead

N O TE
of H1 CENT.
3A-6
Color Monitor Serv icing
Figure 3A-4
CRT - Front
V
R425 CENT
Horizontal Adjust:
50 Hz Systems 60 Hz Systems
Vertical Adjust
H1
CENT
R721
H2
CENT
R724
Data Ray Color Monitor Image Centering Adjustment Locations
3A-7
Moni tor Ti lt -Swivel (Twivel ) Serv icing
Monitor Tilt-Swivel (Twivel) Servicing
The twivel base on which the color monitor rotates/swivels requires critical
assembly and friction adjustment to assure proper monitor movement.
Twivel Disassembly
Disassembly of the twivel base requires use of T10, T15 and T25
N O TE
Torx screwdrivers, and a 7mm nut driver.
1 Remove the color monitor from the system (see Monitor Removal proce-
dure earlier in this Chapter).
2 Unhook the twivel tension spring from the spring holder stud at the front
of the twivel base (refer to Figure 3A-5).
3 Remove the cable strain relief, cable ties and cable clamps from the
twivel base, to free all monitor cables.
4 Using a Torx 25 screwdriver, remove the two screws that secure the top
cover to the rear of the cart (see item T1-5 in Figure 8-12). After the
screws are removed, abruptly push the top cover toward the front of the
cart to free its holding clamps, then lift it off the cart. Carefully pass the
monitor cables through the holes in the bottom of the twivel base while
lifting the top cover and twivel from the system.
5 Remove the two screws/locknuts holding the twivel washer in place.

Remove these two screws from the bottom of the top cover as shown in
Figure 3A-6.
6 Set the twivel washer, tension spring and spring clamp aside, then lift the
twivel base off the top cover.
7 Remove the two screws that secure the twivel retainer ring to the bar
stop. (Remove these screws from the top of the top cover.) Remove the
twivel retainer ring, plastic liner bearing and bar stop from the top cover.
3A-8
Moni tor Ti lt -Swi vel (Twivel ) Serv icing
Figure 3A-5
Twivel
Cable Base
Strain Relief
Twivel (rear)
Cable Tie
Large
Cable Clamp
Small
Cable Clamp
Twivel
Tension
Spring
Twivel (front)
Spring Holder Stud
- JV M
Tw ivel As sembly, Top View
3A-9
Moni tor Ti lt -Swivel (Twivel ) Serv icing
Figure 3A-6
Cable
Spring Clamp Twivel
Strain Relief
Washer
Twivel Base
Twivel
Retainer Ring Screws
Retainer Ring
Twivel
Liner Bearing
Cart Top (rear)
Cart Top (front)
Twivel
Bar Stop
-JV M
Twivel Washer Screws
Tw ivel Di sassembly
3A-10
Moni tor Ti lt -Swi vel (Twivel ) Serv icing
Twivel Reassembly
Reassemble the twivel base by performing the preceding procedure in
reverse order, being sure to make note of the following:
Before securing the twivel retainer ring to the bar stop, vertically align the
four screw holes in the center of the ring with the front and back of the top
cover. Then tighten the two screws into the bar stop. This will allow proper
left/right twivel rotation.
When installing the tension spring clamp, align it vertically with the twivel
washer and secure it in place using the front twivel washer locknut.
DO NOT fully tighten the lock nuts that hold the twivel washer in place.
Just position them loosely over the washer mounting screws. After the
twivel has been reassembled into the system, tighten the lock nuts to obtain
proper twivel friction as described in the adjustment procedure below.
Twivel Friction Adjustment

Perform the following friction adjustment after the twivel is re-assembled to
the system, or when twivel movement is suspected of requiring adjustment.
1 Position and hold the twivel base in its level position and tighten either
one of the twivel washer lock nuts. Tighten the nut until it just counter-
acts the tension spring and holds the twivel base level, then back-off the
nut exactly 1/2 turn.
2 Position and hold the twivel base in its level position again and tighten
the other twivel washer lock nut. Tighten this nut just until the base will
stay level.
3 Retighten the first lock-nut exactly 1/2 turn.
4 Check the friction adjustment by pushing the base from its level position.
When you let go of the base, spring tension should return it to its level
position.
3A-11
Circuit Breaker Replacement
1 Make sure that system is unplugged from the wall.
2 Unlatch the cart top and raise it.
3 Remove the E-Box air filter from the Circuit Breaker side.
4 Firmly grasp the plastic side cover from the front and the rear and pull it
out. The cover is form fitted and requires no hardware.
5 Remove four screws securing the circuit breaker bracket to the cart side
and angle the part forward. If necessary, push the wires along the side of
the cart to increase the slack.
6 Remove the two screws securing the breaker to the bracket and unplug
the four push connectors.
7 Mount the new breaker reversing the removal process.
Notice that the LINE wires are on the left as you face the breaker
CA U TI O N
and the LOAD wires are on the right. Make sure to maintain the
same polarity as on the original part.
3A-12
Figure 3A-7
Line
Load
300e056
3A-13
Main Supply Fan Replacement
The fan assembly is integrated to the front panel of the power supply.
If one fan fails, all three fans should be replaced as a unit.
To replace proceed as follows:
1 Find an appropriate work area and pull the wheel lock down to secure
and immobilize the system.
2 Pull the power supply forward about three inches.
3 Remove 2 screws from both the top and bottom of the supply.
4 Remove 4 screws from the front panel and remove the entire assembly by
disconnecting the fan connector. Note polarity of the plug.
Reverse the procedure to install the new part.
Make sure to plug in the connector correctly. Although it is keyed, it

CA U TI O N
can be forced the wrong way during installation.
3A-14
Figure 3A-8
SLOTTED SIDE FACING

THIS WAY
300e053
3A-15
Touch Screens Replacement
The touch screens in front of the EL panels are exposed to mechanical

damage like scratches etc. due to their location within the system. If it
becomes necessary to replace the screens, follow the procedure and
guidelines below.
Whenever the EL panels or touch screens are disassembled, extreme

CA U TI O N
care must be taken to wipe the entire inside mating surfaces of both
the touch screen and EL panel with an ANTI-STATIC wipe pad, or a
staticide dampened lint-free cloth. Failure to properly perform this
anti-static cleaning requirement may leave an electrostatic charge
between the panel and screen surfaces, causing the display to emit a
high pitched whine.
External surfaces of the touch screen (the surface used by
customers) can be cleaned with a water moistened cloth or an
isopropyl alcohol solution.
1 Remove power from the system.
2 Loosen the two 1/4 turn screws beneath the cart handle and lift the key-
board assembly so that the rear of the EL panels are facing up. Make use
of the service arm stored in the main top housing to keep the keyboard
panel in the open service position.
3 Remove the four screws holding the panel; there is no need to disconnect
it, but it may be easier to remove if you disconnect the two ribbon cables
at the EL panel PC Board. Set the panel aside.
4 With care, disconnect the four conductor flexible ribbon that is inte-
grated to the touch panel. PROCEED WITH CAUTION - A KINK IN
THIS RIBBON CABLE MAY DESTROY IT!
5 Now you may lift the touch panel from the locating pins. Make sure to
clean the area around where the panel meets the housing.
6 Reassemble the unit being sure to wipe clean the mating surfaces of the
panel and screen as instructed in the CAUTION above. Allow the mating
surfaces to air dry; do not wipe dry, as this may build a charge on the sur-
faces. After the surfaces are completely dry, assemble the panel and
screen with as little sliding motion as possible.
3A-16
Figure 3A-9
ELECTROLUMINESCENT
PANEL (EL)
MYLAR
SPACER
TOUCH PANEL
(SCREEN)
BACKSIDE OF
KEYSCANNER
FRAME
5gjl019
3A-17
Car t Wheels and Brake Servicing
Cart Wheels and Brake Servicing
Replacement procedures for the cart rear wheels and front wheel/brake
assemblies are described in the following paragraphs.
Rear Wheel Replacement

Each rear wheel is integral to its pivoting caster (see Figure 8-15).
Replacement of either rear wheel therefore requires replacement of the
integral rear wheel and caster assembly.
The cart is quite heavy. Use caution while performing the following
CA U TI O N
steps to avoid injury.
1 Apply the brake to the front wheels of the cart.
2 Raise the back end of the cart slightly by pulling up on the rear handle
while another person slides support blocks beneath both sides of the cart.
Secure the cart in this upright position so that both rear wheels are raised
slightly off the floor.
3 Using a 13 mm socket wrench, reach beneath either rear wheel/caster and

remove the four bolts and washers that secure the caster to the bottom of
the cart; swivel the wheel as needed to gain access to all four bolts.
4 Secure the replacement wheel/caster to the cart by replacing the four

washers and bolts removed above; torque each bolt at 130 inch pounds.
5 Remove the support blocks from beneath the cart.
3A-18
Car t Wheels and Brake Servicing
Front Wheel Replacement

The two front wheels may be replaced independently (see Figure 8-16).
CA U TI O N
steps to avoid injury.
1 Release the front wheel brakes.
2 Secure the rear pivoting wheels with wedges, assuring that the cart can
neither roll nor pivot (aligning both rear wheels in parallel with the cart
prior to wedging minimizes system movement).
3 Raise the front end of the cart slightly by pulling up on the front handle,
Secure the cart in this upright position so that both front wheels are
raised slightly off the floor.
4 Using a 4mm hex head wrench, remove the screw that holds the wheel to
its front axle. Next, remove the retainer ring and hub cap, then slide the
wheel off the axle. (Leave the two curved washers behind the wheel in
place on the axle.)
5 Slide the replacement wheel over the front axel against the two washers.
Then replace the hub cap, retainer ring and screw, tightening the screw to
a torque of 90 inch pounds.
6 Remove the support blocks from beneath the cart, and the wedges from
the rear wheels.
3A-19
Cart Wheels and Brake Servicing
Front Brake Replacement

The left and right front-wheel brake assemblies are quite durable and rarely
require replacement. However, should brake replacement become necessary,
do not disassemble individual brake parts in the field. Instead, replace the
entire left or right assembly as shown in Figure 8-13.
CAUTION steps to avoid injury.
1 Release the front wheel brakes.
2 Secure the rear pivoting wheels with wedges, assuring that the cart can
neither roll nor pivot (aligning both rear wheels in parallel with the cart
prior to wedging minimizes system movement).
3 Raise the front end of the cart slightly by pulling up on the front handle,
Secure the cart in this upright position so that both front wheels are
raised slightly off the floor.
4 At the front of the cart, remove the OEM peripheral (or blank panel) from
the lowest peripheral mounting position.
5 Remove the two Torx screws from the lower part of the panel that is
located behind the brake foot bar, then pull away the panel.
6 Remove the cart rear door, then unplug the three cables from the rear
panel of the main power supply. Also unplug the power supply from the
power outlet strip mounted inside the cart rear corner post. After the
power supply is free of cables, slide it out from the front of the cart.
7 Using a Torx 25 screwdriver, loosen and remove the Suspension Collar

from the brake assembly being removed. There are two Suspension Col-
lars; one holds the left brake assembly and the other holds the right brake
assembly (refer to Figure 8-13, item C0-5).
8 Using a 9/16 wrench, remove the nut from the top of the suspension
spring on the brake assembly being removed. (The suspension spring
secures the brake assembly to the cart base.
9 Remove the 4mm hex head screw and brake lever cap from the end of the
brake foot bar (items W0-11 and W0-12 in Figure 8-16), then slide the
entire brake assembly from the cart. As the assembly is being removed,
set aside the two Suspension Bearings (item C0-4 in Figure 8-13) for use
when reinstalling the assembly.
3A-20
4 RST - Description - Use
Overview
The Model M2406A Ultrasound System includes built-in troubleshooting tests
that are designed around the architecture of system hardware and software.
Hardware hooks throughout the digital electronics provide specific reference
signals for the Resident Self Test (RST) diagnostic software.
All system testing follows the Inverted Pyramid principle; i.e., the most
fundamental portions of the system are tested first. After those tests are
passed, testing continues along a hierarchy of a pre-established priorities.
The RST test procedures are accessible through a menu driven user
interface. The test menus are organized in a hierarchical structure with a
single root menu located on the Main Test Menu, and lower level menus
available on a series of second level RST screens. The more sophisticated
features of the system require traversing to the lower level screens.
RST Menu Hierarchy

❏ Figure 4-1 provides a sample display of the menu hierarchy.
❏ Figures 4-2 through 4-4 list a sample sub-module hierarchy test for the
Keyboard Processor, Scan Converter and Scanner.
Information provided in figures 4-1 through 4-4 is subject to change.

NOTE Module and submodule tests can be added or removed without
notice. The RST user interface will present the current set of module
and submodule tests.
4-1
Figure 4-1
RST Menu Flow Diagram
Test Menu
Run Basic Test
Run Extended Basic
Key Processor Keyboard Processor
Scan Converter Scan Converter
Scanner Scanner Subsystem Ext Basic
Other Tests & Utilities Other Tests & Utilities Subsystem Ext Basic 01 Keyscanner
Test Setup Subsystem Ext Basic 01 P/G-Processor 02 Physio
Test Setup Calibrate Touch Panels 01 Digital Control 02 PVT-Timing RST Error Log
Run Time Error Log Dot Tests 02 Xmit Power Supply 03 Image Memory Previous Menu
System Information Test Once 03 Image Detector 04 PVT-Video
RST Error Log Test Continuously Control Panel Test 04 TGC 05 P/G-Graphics
Halt on RST Error Test Patterns 05 Coarse Delay 06 R-Theta See Figure 4-2 for Submodules
Accumulate RST Errors Video I/O A to D Test 06 FE, FD, Distr 07 Video I/O
Erase Pass/Fail Counts Video Display Path Test 07 Front End 08 Scanner I/O
Previous Menu Preset Backup 08 Doppler Detector 0A Combined CLR *
Equipment Service RST Error Log 0B Flow Processor
Previous Menu 0C Doppler Processor
Run Time Error Log Options 0D AQ (ABD)
Factory Tests See Figure 4-4 for Submodules 0E DSR
Log Entry Details Stripchart Tests 0F Stripchart
Erase Log Clear Bat-Backed RAM RST Error Log
Previous Menu More Dot Tests Previous Menu
Previous Menu Sector
Linear Part 1 See Figure 4-2, 4-3 for Submodules
Linear Part 2
System Information Previous Menu
Hardware ID Test Patterns
Software Revisions
Previous Menu Presets Backup 8 Color Bars 75%
8 color Bars 100%
Backup Presets To KP 64 Grey Scale Setup
RST Error Log Restore Presets From KP Multiburst
Erase Log Previous Menu Convergence Grid
Previous Menu Video Threshold
White Rectangle
Equipment Service Color Printer Test
Color Triangle
Filter Cleaning White Screen
System Chronometer Black Screen
Previous Menu Red Screen
Green Screen
Blue Screen
Four Grey Squares
Factory Tests More
Previous Menu
Left Transmitter Test
Right Transmitter Test
Previous Menu
Stripchart Tests
Run Graybar Test
Previous Menu
* NOTE : At Rev. B.O, B&W CLR and color CLR boards are combined. 6fcl021.fm
Figure 4-2
Submodule Test Hierarchy
Keyboard Processor Tests

Submodules:
Keyscanner K0101
Physio K0102
K0201 K0103
K0202 K0104
K0203 K0105
K0204
Scan Converter Tests
Submodules:
P/G-Processor D0101
PVT-Timing D0104
D0201 D0105
D0106
Image Memory D0301
D0107
D0108
PVT-Video D0302 D0109
D0401 D0303 D010A
P/G-Graphics D0402 D0304 D0111
D0501 D0403 D0305
R-Theta D0503 D0404 D0306
D0601 D0504 D0405 D0307
Video I/O D0602 D0505 D0406 D0308
D0701 D0603 D0407 D0309
Scanner I/O D0702 D0604 D0409 D0310
D0801 D0703 D0605 D0311
D0802 D0704 D0606 D0410 D0312
* B&W CLR D0803 D0705 D0607 D0411 D0313
D0901 D0804 D0706 D0608 D0412
D0902 D0805 D0707 D0609 D0413
Color CLR D0806 D0708
D0709 D060A D0414
D0A01 D0807 D070A D060B D0415
D0A02 D070B D060C
D0A03 D070C D060D
D0A04 D0711 D060E
D0A05 D0712 D060F
D0713 D0610
D0A06 D0714 D0611
D0715 D0612
D0716 D0626
D0717 D0627
D0718
D0719
D071A
D071B
D071C
D071D
* B&W CLR board deleted at Rev. B.0 D071E
D071F
D0721
D0722
D0723
D0724
D0725
D0726
Figure 4-3
Submodule Test Hierarchy (Continued)
Scan Converter Tests (Continued)

Submodules
Flow Processor
D0B01
D0B02
Doppler Processor D0B03
D0C01 D0B04
D0C02 D0B05
AQ (ABD) D0C03 D0B06
D0D01 D0C04 D0B07
DSR D0D02 D0C05 D0B08
D0D03 D0C06 D0B0A
D0E01 D0D04 D0B0C
Stripchart D0E02 D0C07 D0B0D
D0E03 D0D05
D0D06 D0B12
D0F01 D0E04 D0D07 D0B13
D0F02 D0E05 D0D08 D0B14
D0F03 D0E06 D0D09 D0B15
D0F04 D0E07 D0B16
D0F05 D0E08 D0B17
D0F06 D0E09 D0B18
D0F07 D0E0A D0B19
D0E0B D0B1A
D0F08 D0E0C D0B1B
D0F09 D0E0D D0B1C
D0F0A D0E0E D0B1D
D0F0B D0E0F D0B1E
D0F0C D0E10 D0B1F
D0F0D D0E11 D0B20
D0F0E D0E12 D0B21
D0E13 D0B23
D0F0F D0E14
D0F10 D0B24
D0E15
D0F21
D0F22
D0F23
D0F24
D0F25
D0F26
D0F27
D0F28
D0F29
D0F2A
Figure 4-4
Submodule Test Hierarchy (Continued)
Scanner Tests
Submodules:
Digital Control E0201
E0202
Xmit Power Supply E0203
E0301 E0204
E0302 E0205
Image Detector E0303 E0206
E0401 E0304 E0207
E0402 E0305 E0208
TGC E0403 E0306 E0209
E0501 E0404 E020A
Coarse Delay E0502
E0601 E0503
E0602 E0504
FE, FD, Distr E0505
E0701 E0506
E0702 E0507
Front End E0703 E0508
E0801 E0704 E0509
Doppler Detector E0802 E0705 E050A
E0901 E0803 E0706 E050B
E0902 E0804 E0707 E050C
E0903 E0805 E0708 E050D
E0709 E050E
E070A E050F
E070B E0510
E070C E0511
E070D
E070E
E070F
E0710
E0711
E0712
E0713
E0714
E0715
E0716
E0717
E0718
E0719
E071A
E071B
E071C
RST - Description - Use
RST Definitions and Acronyms
Basic Test A non-exhaustive test of hardware along our imaging and

video data paths. Basic test executes submodule tests in
multiple subsystems and has a total execution duration goal
of less than 7.5 minutes.
Basic test verifies correct overall instrument operation.
Errors can be non-specific, indicting a problem with the
instrument, while not identifying a specific PC board.
Basic test includes optional boards that are part of the
imaging and video paths such as CLR and AQ if present, but
does not include peripherals such as the DSR and Stripchart
boards.
Extended An exhaustive test of al testable hardware: imaging and video
paths, RAM, ROM, optional boards and peripheral interface
boards. Extended test executes submodule tests in multiple
subsystems and has a total execution duration goal of less
than 15 minutes.
Extended test verifies detailed instrument operation. Failures
must be identified to the failed PC board.
Factory
Basic This executes the Extended Basic test with slightly different
control semantics: run continuously and collect all errors. It is
used as an endurance test during manufacturing and
environmental factory testing.
Module Corresponds generally to a PC board, but it can refer to two or
more PC boards or a major function of one PC board.
Module Test A collection of submodule tests to examine the overall
operation of the Module.
RST Errors Deficiencies found during the execution of submodule tests.
4-6
Run Time
Errors Errors detected by application software during its normal

execution.
Submodule A circuit or a specific electronic component within a PC
board.
Submodule
Test A single function testing the correct operation of a

submodule.
Subsystem One of the components of the system: Keyprocessor
Electronics, Scan Converter, and Scanner.
4-7
Interface Components
Each screen of the interface contains one or more of the following

components:
❏ Menus
❏ List boxes
❏ Option buttons
❏ Progress boxes
❏ Static screens
Menus - Definition
A menu is a collection of selectable items, from which the user can select one
at a time. Each item in a menu causes the system either to execute a
particular test or display another screen. Menu items can be selected by
using the trackball and Enter key combination, or with a hotkey. The
designated letter appears in red and is underlined in the menu title to indicate
a hotkey. When a menu item is selected, the menu items label is briefly
displayed in inverse video prior to its associated action being invoked.
4-8
Figure 4-5
Sample of Main Menu RST Screen
Test Menu
System: :system type
Serial No. :3003A10013

Run Basic Test
Run Extended Basic
Doppler : Absent
Keyprocessor CLR : Present
NOTE:
Scan Converter Video : RS 170 US
Scanner Stripchart : Kowa
An asterisk by the
VCR : Pan S-VHS
Run Time or RST
Other Tests & Utilities Color Printer : Sony UP-5X00
er ror log menu
Test Setup B/W Printer : Absent
entr y signifies
DSR : Present
Run Time Error log * : Present
that error codes
AQ
have been
System Information * Physios : Absent
generated and
are stored in the Erase Pass / Fail Counts Keybd : English

log.
RST Error Log *
Name Part Number Rev.

To Exit Test mode BE M2406 - 11000 A.0
press Test key KP M2406 - 10000 A.0
FE M2406 - 10000 A.0
DSR 77100 - 11000
List Boxes
List Boxes are, as the name implies, boxes surrounding lists. They allow the
user to select multiple items from a master list. NEXT and PREV fields
are provided in the list border so the user can page through the list. These
fields are activated using the trackball to place the arrow on top of your
selection, then press ENTER. For an example of List Boxes, see the error log
screen example on page 4-26.
4-9
Option Buttons
Option buttons are displayed as small circles on the screen with adjacent
descriptive text. The button next to the currently selected option is solid
(filled), while the other buttons are outlined (empty). When a new option is
selected, its button becomes solid and the previously selected button
becomes empty.
Option Buttons allow the user to select from one of several mutually
exclusive choices. These items differ from menus in that the item selected
modifies the future behavior of the system, but does not cause the system to
transition to a new screen or mode. Option buttons are not highlighted like
menu items but can be selected using hotkeys or trackball-and-Enter key.
Command Buttons
Command buttons allow the user to acknowledge or cancel an operation

before the operation is executed. Command buttons appear in message
boxes displayed in the center of the display. The two command buttons are
OKAY and CANCEL.
Progress Boxes
Progress boxes identify the subsystem, module, and submodule of the

currently executing submodule test, and indicate whether RST errors have
been detected during the test. Progress boxes are especially helpful during
long tests that do not otherwise modify the display when underway.
Dependent on which tests are being executed, progress boxes may or may
not appear on the monitor or EL panel.
4-10
Test Modes - Description
Interactive RST
The operator places the system into interactive RST by pressing the Test key
while in imaging mode. The system responds by resetting, clearing the touch
panel displays, and displaying the Main Test Menu.
The operator exits interactive RST by again pressing the Test key. The system
responds by resetting and returning to imaging mode, using the set of presets
that were loaded at the time interactive RST was entered. If the system is
reset while in interactive RST, the system returns to interactive RST, clearing
the touch panel displays and displaying the Main Test Menu.
Hardware problems can prevent the system from initializing into imaging
mode. The Service Engineer can debug such conditions by forcing the system
to initialize into interactive RST. To accomplish that, depress the Test key,
and keep it depressed while you reset the system. When the system detects
the forced transition into RST, the Test key LED will light. Release the Test
key at this time and the Main Test Menu of Interactive RST will be displayed.
Some resident tests require the operator to take action to exit them.
N O TE
Most pattern tests, all system summary screens, and all dot tests
are exited by the operator pressing the Enter key. The control panel
test, the Video Display Path Test, and Video I/O A to D Test require
the system to be reset to exit them.
Factory Basic
Factory Basic is a collection of submodules spanning all three subsystems.

Each submodule is executed in turn, one at a time. When all submodules
have been executed, Factory Basic repeats. Resetting the system or cycling
power returns the system to Factory Basic.
Factory Basic is not affected by test setup.
4-11
The operator places the system into Factory Basic by pressing the Shift-Test
key combination from either imaging mode or interactive RST. The system
responds by resetting, displaying the message Beginning Factory Basic
Test and executing the submodules that are part of Factory Basic.
During execution of Factory Basic, a progress box and the message,
System is in Factory Basic test mode; press Test key to return to
normal mode. are displayed on the touch panel display for tests executing
on the Scan Converter and on the CRT display for tests executing on either
the Keyboard Processor or the Scanner. The progress box and message must
move from one display to the other in order to provide a constant display of
these screen components during test execution.
The operator exits Factory Basic by pressing the Test key. The system
responds by resetting and entering the previous mode of operation: either the
imaging mode or interactive RST.
If Factory Basic cannot be executed, the system will display a message in the
middle of the CRT describing the reason the test cannot be run.
(Example: Remove transducers and put the bail down.)
When this message is acknowledged, the system again attempts to execute
Factory Basic.
Stand Alone Basic
The operator places a subsystem into Stand Alone Basic by disconnecting

cables providing communication between the subsystems or pulling boards
to below the minimum configuration required to execute interactive RST, and
powering the system on. When a subsystem initializes without the ability to
communicate with the other subsystems, it executes Stand Alone Basic on its
own, collects RST Errors as they occur, and displays the results on the four
digit LED located on the processor boards. The Scan Converter will require
the switch on the Scanner I/O board set to use the local clock (this results in
error code DD090).
Stand Alone basic is not affected by test configuration. The scanner will
require switch 5 set to allow use of the digital control boards four character
LED. The scanner might not execute properly after power is cycled when the
4-12
communication cable from the scanner I/O board to the digital control board
is disconnected. The reset signal to the scanner is sent over this cable. This
signal is sent after the voltages in the scanner subsystem have had time to
stabilize. When this cable is disconnected, the processor on the digital
control board might begin execution before all voltages are at the correct
level, preventing the subsystem from initializing. If the scanner does not
enter SAB, toggle switch 8 on the digital control board. This will send a reset
signal to the digital control board processor and begin correct initialization.
For other details on Stand Alone Basic, see information under Processor
Board LEDs later in this chapter.
Basic and Extended Basic
Basic and Extended Basic are entered from the Main Test Menu:
The system responds to entering Basic by displaying the message Begin-
ning Basic Test in the center of the CRT, it then begins executing the
submodules that are part of Basic.
The system responds to entering Extended Basic by displaying the message
Beginning Extended Basic Test in the center of the CRT. It then
begins executing the submodules that are part of Extended Basic.
Basic and Extended basic are not affected by test configuration.

Basic and Extended Basic, like Factory Basic, execute a collection of
submodules spanning all of the subsystems. Unlike Factory Basic, these tests
will execute all appropriate submodules on each subsystem only once. RST
errors detected during execution will be recorded in the RST Error Log.
4-13
Test Configuration
Test Configuration
Tests may be configured through the Test Setup Screen available from the
Main Menu.
The operator can configure tests to run one time or continuously and to halt
when an RST Error is detected or to accumulate errors in the RST Error Log.
The configuration applies globally to all configured tests. The default
behavior is to run once and accumulate errors.
The tests which are affected by these option settings are:
❏ Subsystem Extended Basic Tests
❏ Module Tests
❏ Submodule Group Tests
Specifically excluded from configuration are the Basic, Extended Basic, and
Factory Basic tests.
Subsystem Extended Basic
The operator enters Subsystem Extended Basic tests from any of the
subsystem screens via the Main Menu.
Subsystem Extended Basic executes Extended Basic test on the selected
subsystem. The system responds to entering Subsystem Extended Basic by
executing each submodule on the specified subsystem.
During Subsystem Extended Basic, the system updates the pass/fail counts of
the subsystem and each module.
Module and Submodule Group
Module tests and submodule group tests are both selected through
subsystem screens. A pair of option buttons in the lower right corner of each
subsystem screen determines which test mode will be in effect.
4-14
Test Configuration
When either Modules (the default) or Submodules mode is selected for any
subsystem, that mode is assumed for all subsystems. The selected mode will
be maintained, through system reset and cycles of power until it is explicitly
set to the other mode.
Module
The operator may enter a module test from any of the subsystem screens.
The operator first selects the Modules option (the default) from the option
buttons in the lower right corner of the subsystem screen. The operator then
selects the module to be executed.
During the module test, the Pass/Fail counts for the specified module test
will be updated.
Submodule Group
The operator enters a submodule group test from any of the subsystem
screens.
The operator first selects the Submodules option from the lower right corner
of the subsystem screen. The operator then selects the module and
submodules to be run.
4-15
User-Dependent Tests
The following sections describe tests which require user intervention to

decide if each test passes or fails.
Control Panel
The operator enters the control panel test from the Other Tests & Utilities
Screen:
The control panel test exercises the components of the control panel:
keyboard, hard keys, trackball, TGCs, LGCs, pots, and rotary knobs. The test
displays a depiction of the control panel on the touch panel display, and each
time a component is pressed, moved, or turned, the resulting action is
mimicked in the depiction.
The control panel test is exited by resetting the system. After reset, the
system will return to the Main Test Menu. A prompt appears on the CRT
display during test execution:
To exit the control panel test, press RESET
Dot Tests
The operator enters each of the three Dot tests from the Dot Tests Screen
(which is a sub-set of the Other Test & Utilities menu selectable from the
Main Menu Screen).
1 Sector
2 Linear Part 1.
3 Linear Part 2.
4 Previous Menu.
4-16
The dot test looks for missing elements on probes.
Probes must be plugged into the left transducer slot.
Each element of the probe is fired in turn and its echo is recorded. The
system displays a line for each element of the probe. Missing lines indicate
failed elements.
If the wrong probe type is plugged in, the system will display a message
indicating the correct probe type for the selected test. After this message has
been acknowledged, the system displays the Dot Tests Screen.
The operator exits each of the Dot Tests by pressing the Enter key. The
system returns the CRT display to the Dot Test Screen. A prompt appears
on the touch panel display during each Dot Test: Press Enter to End Dot
Test .
4-17
Dot Test s - Detail s
Dot Tests - Details
The purpose of the transducer Dot Test is to check the combination of Front
End electronics and the transducer itself for dead channels or elements. It
provides unique coverage in that it uses the transducer, thereby testing the
entire imaging path. The test is qualitative in nature so that no error codes
will be returned. In effect, the transducer Dot Test is a special imaging mode
in which a subset of imaging controls, namely the TGC's and GAIN, are
active.
This test only works with the transducer plugged in the left side
N O TE
connector!.
PV Transducers with 288 elements must be tested in two stages. Each stage
will test 144 elements.
Description
A Lucite test block is used in order to have a flat surface to place against the
transducer lens and a parallel surface within the focal length of the
transducer under test. Gel is used to match the impedance between the lens
surface and the Lucite block. The far surface of the block is used as a
reflecting surface or target. This surface will appear on the middle of the
screen or the bottom, depending on the size of the Lucite block used, which
in turn must be chosen according to the focal length of the transducer under
test.
The specialized linear display format makes it easier to discern dead

channels. 64, 96, 128 or 144 lines are shot, depending on the transducer type.
Each vertical line on the display is generated by transmitting a burst with all
elements simultaneously, but receiving with each transducer element/
receiver combination one at a time. (Therefore, the test will not detect
defective transmitter channels.) A special bistable post-processing map is
programmed to make it easier to detect dead elements/channels. Along the
bottom of the display, a row of numbers and graphics identifies each of the
element/channel numbers.
4-18
Above the top of the display, a series of hash marks may be drawn to
N O TE
identify known bad transducer elements. These are elements that
have not performed at initial factory testing, but have not prevented
the transducer from meeting specifications.
The operator of the test should be looking for missing dots at the bottom or
center of the display (depending on which block is used). The missing dots
indicate either a bad transducer element or a defective electronic channel.
At Revision B.0 a Gain setting is displayed on the DOT test screen. This is
for reference only.
If a problem is found, running RST for the Scanner will in most cases produce
an error code that will point either to a transmitting or receiving channel.
This would not only prove that the fault is in the electronics but will also help
localize the defective PCB. If no error codes are reported, the problem is
assumed to be in the transducer. For confirmation, a known good transducer
must be used.
Required Elements
In order to run the Dot Test correctly, the following elements are needed:
❏ Long transducer test block, Part # 77020-20010

❏ Short transducer test block, Part # 77020-20030
❏ AQUASONIC 100 (TM) Coupling gel, Part # 9301-0187
Procedure
The following steps should be followed in the given sequence:
❏ Plug in the Transducer to be tested (left side connector only).

❏ Select the appropriate Dot Test from the Other Tests and Utilities menu
available at the Main Test Menu screen.
❏ Holding the transducer vertically, apply a small amount of gel to the
transducer lens. Place the test block on the transducer so the block is
centered and there are no bubbles trapped at the interface. Press lightly
to remove air and excess gel, but do not hold the block pressing it
against the transducer.
4-19
As a rule, use the long block for low frequency transducers and the
N O TE
short block for higher frequency transducers (3.5 MHz and higher).
It is important to realize that there is a need for careful alignment

between the transducer and test block so that the transducer lens is
parallel to the flat surface on the test block. Move the transducer
slightly to the left and right to find the best reading.
❏ Find the transmit turn on value by gradually increasing the GAIN

control until the row of dots appear at the bottom of the display (if using
the long block) or the center of the display (if using the short block).
Test Interpretation
Since the test provides qualitative information, service actions will depend
on:
❏ Element/channel presence.
❏ Uniformity of Element and relative channel sensitivity.
The following statements may be used as a guide:
Dead elements on a transducer that are not marked by a hash mark above the
display indicate elements that have been damaged since shipment from the
factory or bad system channels. Depending on the location and the number
of dead elements, imaging performance may be affected requiring further
action.
Typically, missing channels on the outside of the transducer array have little
effect on image quality. If the image is degraded, the source of the problem
(system or transducer) should be fault isolated as described on the previous
page.
Since the test may only be performed with the transducer connected
to the left connector, keep in mind that defects on the right
connector/distribution board would go undetected by this test.
In the case of the 288 element PV transducers, the Dot Test must be
performed in two stages. Each stage tests a set of 144 elements.
4-20
Processor Board LEDs
This section discusses the interactive test behavior of the four digit LED
displays located on the processor boards of each subsystem.
This information becomes particularly important in the event that

N O TE
troubleshooting must be done when the main display is not operational.
As a first step, place the subsystem in question into Stand Alone Basic
Mode by disconnecting the cables that provide communication between the
subsystems, and powering the system on.
❏ Digital Ribbon Cable from Scanner I/O to Digital Control/TGC at Scanner

I/O side, Cable Part # 77100-64560 (internal to E-Box).
❏ Analog Ribbon Cable from Scanner I/O to Image Detector Board, Cable
Part # 77100-64550 (internal to E-Box).
❏ For the keyboard processor, disconnect the RS232 cable that runs from
the rear of the E-Box to the Main I/O board in the keyboard area. Cable
Part # 77921-64060.
When Stand Alone Basic begins, the LEDs read SAB for two seconds prior
to executing the submodule tests. During the test, the module and submodule
number of each test will be displayed on the LEDs.
Each RST error consists of two parts: the first four digits represent the
module and submodule of the failed test. The last four digits contain
additional information for factory use.
When errors are found, XX ERRORS FOUND followed by ERROR

CODES: XXXX XXXX, XXXX XXXX... will be scrolled repeatedly until
the system resets or the power is cycled. If no errors are found, NO
ERRORS FOUND will be scrolled repeatedly until the system is reset or
the power cycled.
If Stand Alone Basic or Power-Up self Test does not detect any RST Errors,
the processor graphics board display blinks .... until the system is reset or
power is cycled.
4-21
During RST execution, if no submodule test is executing, each four

N O TE
digit LED display blinks the following pattern ..... When a resident
test that is comprised of submodule tests is invoked on a subsystem,
the module number and submodule number of each submodule test
is displayed on the LED prior to the submodule tests execution. For
instance, if module 4 submodule 3 is executing on the Scanner, the
Scanner DC board LED display reads 0403. When all of the
submodules comprising the resident test module 04 completes, the
display returns to blinking the pattern .....
4-22
Test Patterns
Test Patterns
Stimulus Loops / Patterns

The service engineer may access test patterns through the Test Patterns
Screen which is a sub-set of theOther Tests & Utilities available from the
Main Menu.
Test Patterns is a category of interactive testing that leaves the system in a
certain state for an indefinite amount of time. This allows for a test pattern to
be left on the screen as long as desired. See Table 4-1 for definitions of each
test pattern.
To exit a selected test pattern, press ENTER; the system returns to the Test
Pattern Menu Screen.
Table 4-1 Test Pattern Definitions
Tes t Pat tern Descr iption Typical Use
8 Color Bars 75% Encoder test, color guns

8 Color Bars 100% Encoder test, color guns
64 Grey Scale Setup * Dynamic range
Multiburst Resolution
Convergence, Grid Linearity/Convergence
Video Threshold Merging of B/W with color
White Rectangle Monitor adjustment
Color Printer Tests Adjustment of color printer
Color Triangle Color dynamic range
White Screen High level background tint
Black Screen Low level background tint
Red Screen Color purity
Green Screen Color purity
4-23
Hardcopy
Table 4-1 Test Pattern Definitions
Tes t Pat tern Descr iption Typical Use
Blue Screen Color purity

Four Grey Squares Dynamic Range
Hardcopy
The hardcopy device controlled by the Print hard key is available during RST
execution. The print key is controlled by the B/W image print device of the
last preset that was saved.
In addition to the Print key, each device is available during RST execution
through its own front panel.
Some submodule tests exercise the interface to hardcopy devices, thereby

temporarily disabling the hardcopy device.
The hardcopy device will become available as soon as the test completes.
4-24
Sys tem Information
System Information
The System Information Screen available from the Main Menu allows you to
access software or hardware information.
The operator exits each of the system information screens by pressing the
Enter key. The display returns to the Main System Information Screen.
An example of this feature is the hardware information screen sample that

follows.
Figure 4-6
Sample Hardware ID Screen
A1 B1 FDLY 0 60440
A2 CDLY 5 60550* B2 FDLY 1 60440
A3 CDLY 4 60550* B3 FEND 0 60330*
A4 CDLY 3 60570* B4 FEND 1 60330*
A5 CDLY 2 60560* B5 FEND 2 60330*
A6 CDLY 1 60570* B6 FEND 3 60330*
A7 CDLY 0 60560* B7 FEND 4 60330*
A8 XMTVLT 62700 B8 FEND 5 60330*
A9 PV B9 FEND 6 60330*
61220*
A10 B10 FEND 7 60330*
A11 IDET2 B11 FDLY 2 60440
60670
A12 DDET B12 FDLY 3 60440
61180
A13 IDET1 60660 B13 TGC 60930
* DENOTES DERIVED BOARD ID B14 DC 60840
B15 DISTR 60250*
C14 SIO 65160

C13 DP 65210
C12 SCSI 65310
C11 CFP 65440
C10
C9 RTH 65530
C8 ABD 66380
C7 IM 65630
C6 SC 66300
C5 PVT 65700
C4 VIO 66010
C3 CLCLR 65900
C2 BWCLR 65800
C1 PG 66280
4-25
Sys tem Information
Logs
This section discusses the RST Error Log and Run Time Error Log. These logs
are independent and are maintained over system resets and cycling of power.
An asterisk by the error log name in the Main Menu means that the log
contains error codes.
RST Error Log
The operator accesses the RST Error Log through the Main Menu or through
any menu which detects RST errors. (Figures 4-1 through 4-4 provide an
overview of the menu hierarchy).
All RST errors detected during test execution are logged. The RST Error Log
presents a time-sorted display of the last 64 RST errors detected during test
execution. Duplicate errors detected at different times are listed separately.
The errors detected by the most recent test set appear at the top of the log,
separated from the older errors by a banner (a series of asterisks *). Each
time a resident test capable of detecting RST errors is executed, a banner is
added to the top of the RST Error Log. If no RST errors are detected, the
banner remains at the top of the log. At most, one banner can appear at the
top of a log. If a Resident Test is executed and a banner already exists at the
top of the log, a second banner is not added. The banner separates only
groups of errors detected during resident tests.
The operator erases the contents of the log by selecting Erase Log
from the
RST Error Log Menu, and confirms the operation with the Erase Log
Confirmation Message.
When the error log is full, new errors will no longer be accumulated!
N O TE
4-26
Sys tem Information
Figure 4-7
Sample RST Error Log Screen
RST Error Log

DATE/TIME ERROR CODE ERROR TEXT
PREV NEXT
1:0728/11:14 D0B23-0000 Flow processor C11. Static
flash rejection EPROM.
2:0728/11:14 D0106-0000 Scan Conv Proc Graph C1.
Bus/68000 comm failure.
Any Scan Conv board.
3:0728/11:14 D0313-0000 Image Memory C7. Fast Persistence
test Exercises Persistence
EEPROMS.
******************************************************
4:072892/08:39 E0602-F101
5:072892/08:40 D0313-0000 Image Memory C7. Fast Persistence

test Exercises Persistence
EEPROMS.
6:072892/08:38 E0602-F101
PREV NEXT
Erase Log
Previous Menu
Run Time Error Log
The operator accesses the Run Time Error Log through the Main menu. Run
time errors are presented in a time-sorted display with the most recent 20 run
time errors appearing at the top of the log. The list box in which the log is
displayed provides the ability to page through the log. See page 4-8 for a
discussion of list box use.
Log Entry Details
The screen shown in Figure 4-8 provides additional information beyond what
is displayed in the run time error log. The screen can be entered by selecting
an error, moving the cursor to the error and pressing ENTER, then selecting
Log Entry Details.
4-27
Sys tem Information
The operator erases the contents of the log by selecting Erase Log from the
Run Time Error Log Menu, and confirms the operation with the Erase Log
Confirmation Message.
When the Run Time Error Log is full, new errors will no longer be
N O TE
accumulated.
Figure 4-8
Sample Run Time Error Log Screen
Run Time Error Log

DATE/TIME ERROR CODE ERROR TEXT
Prev Next
1:083091/14:10 K0105 Right touch panel failed.

Try RTP: K8, also try
KP: K1.
2:0828/11:14 DE106 68000 comm. failure.

Scan Conv. Proc. Graph c1. Bus/
Conv board.
3:0320/08:40 DD313-0000 Image Memory C7. Fast Persistence

test. Exercises Persistence
EEPROMS.
1:083091/14:10 K0105 Right touch panel failed.

Try RTP: K8, also try
KP: K1.
2:0828/11:14 DE106 68000 comm. failure.

Scan Conv. Proc. Graph c1. Bus/
Prev Next
Log Entry Details

Erase Log
Previous Menu
4-28
CMOS RAM (Presets )
CMOS RAM (Presets)
The operator resets custom presets and error logs to their factory values and
stores and restores custom presets and error logs to the Keyboard Processor
through the PRESETS backup option.
The options are:
❏ Erase PRESETS
❏ Backup PRESETS to KP
❏ Restore PRESETS from KP
The erase PRESETS operation resets the non-volatile system memory,

thereby providing a mechanism to correct problems caused by erroneous
values in this memory region.
After erasing PRESETS, the current date and time defaults to

N O TE
00:00:00 1 January 1989. You also must recalibrate the touch panel
displays.
Erase PRESETS operation must be confirmed before it is executed.
The Backup PRESETS to KP and Restore PRESETS from KP operations

provide for easier service related functions by allowing the removal/
replacement of the Processor Graphics board without totally erasing presets
and other information that would otherwise need to be entered manually
after the service is completed.
4-29
Touch Panel Calibration
Touch Panel Calibration
The operator invokes the touch panel calibration function through the Other
Tests & Utilities Screen.
This function prompts the operator to touch locations on each touch panel.
The system uses these locations to calibrate each touch panel display and
stores the calibration values in battery-backed RAM (CMOS).
If CMOS is cleared, the touch panels need to be recalibrated.
Video Tests
Video Path
This test is invoked through theOther Tests & Utilities Screen allowing an
external video source, such as the VCR, to feed a signal through to the CRT.
Video I/O A to D test
This function digitizes the output of the VCR and prepares it as it would for a
signal to be printed on the stripchart. This test is used to debug stripchart
printing problems.
4-30
Stripchart Tes ts
Stripchart Tests
The operator invokes Stripchart Tests through the Other Tests & Utilities
screen.
The Stripchart Test is the Grey Bar test. This test is used to calibrate the
stripchart printer. It writes a grey scale pattern on the stripchart allowing the
operator to adjust the printer controls. Three printer speeds are supported:
25, 50 and 100 mm/s.
Equipment Service
This feature provides the operator or Service Engineer access to utilities

related to system servicing
The Filter Cleaning utility provides for setting the frequency at which the
power-on filter cleaning message shall be displayed. This setting is normally
based on the number of hours since the filters were last observed to need
cleaning.
The System Chronometer utility provides for reviewing and setting the
following:
❏ the date the system was installed at the customer site.
❏ the number of hours the system has been operating since installation.
Filter cleaning and System Chronometer settings are reset when CMOS
N O TE
is erased, and must be configured by the operator or the Service Engineer.
4-31
Net work Utili ty
Network Utility
The operator invokes the network utility screen through the Other Tests &
Utilities Screen.
The purpose of this screen is to allow the operator or Service Engineer to
obtain information about the current Digital Network Interface (DNI)
settings and also to customize DNI operation. The screen is always available,
but only functional if the DNI option is installed.
When the screen is entered, a Summary screen is displayed which lists the
following current configuration settings on DNI:
❏ PC name
❏ Server name
❏ Domain name
❏ Network Interface (DNI) software version number
❏ Windows software version number
❏ PC BIOS version number
❏ IP address
❏ Beep status
The operator or Service Engineer can select the HELP box or type HELP in
the window at the bottom of the screen, followed by a carriage return. This
will provide a list of available commands. Selecting the CANCEL box will
return you to the Other Tests & Utilities Screen .
4-32
5 Error Codes
Error Types
Error codes are divided into two broad categories:
❏ Run Time Errors
❏ Resident Self Test Errors (RST)
Run Time Errors, by definition, are errors detected by the application

software during the normal operation of the system.
In the event that an error is detected while the system is in normal operation,
it will be displayed on the screen with an appropriate message as well as
recorded in the Runtime Error Log.
A source of Run Time Errors may be power line glitches or other momentary
disruptions for which there may not be an immediate solution or fix.
Nevertheless, a log is kept of these errors that may be used as a
troubleshooting reference. The log may be examined as often as required by
invoking the Run Time Error Log from the main test menu.
The best course of action when noting these errors, is to notify the factory so
that corrective action can be taken.
Resident Self Test Errors represent deficiencies that may be present in the
hardware or software. These may be detected and pinpointed by running
submodule tests individually or as a group. The message represented by the
error code will often help in the diagnosis of the failure.
RST is a tool accessed from the main test menu.
During normal operation, error codes and their corresponding messages will
appear on the screen. The error numbers are preceded by a letter that
identifies the subsystem, as follows:
K = Keyprocessor Electronics
E = Scanner
D = Scan Converter
5-1
Error Codes
Error Types
In the event of video failure, the Service Engineer may obtain

N O TE
valuable failure data by resorting to information extracted from the
four digit LEDs incorporated in each subsystem. The messages
associated with each error code are listed in the following pages.
Codes displayed on the LEDs of the subsystem, omit the letter
K, E, or D
To use the LEDs, on the Digital Control Board (Scanner), switch 5
on the same board must be set OFF or OPEN.
The Scan Converter will require the switch on the Scanner I/O board
set to use the local clock during Stand Alone Basic testing.
Table 5-1 Error Code Tables
Table ID Error Type Subsystem Page #
5KRST Resident Test Keyprocessor Electronics 5K-1 to 5K-6
5ERST Resident Test Scanner 5E-1 to 5E-30
5DRST Resident Test Scan Converter 5D-1 to 5D-10
5-2
Error Codes
Errors on LEDs during Stand Alone Basic Testing

When tests complete, XX ERRORS FOUND or NO ERRORS FOUND
will be scrolled on the LEDs. For example, if four errors are found, the
following string will be displayed: 04 ERRORS FOUND.
If no errors are found NO ERRORS FOUND will be scrolled repeatedly until
the system is re-set or the power is cycled.
The message announcing the number of errors will be followed by the display
of each error code in two parts: four hexadecimal characters for the error
code and four hexadecimal characters for the error data.
The error data (second set of 4 characters) is intended for factory

N O TE
use and unless a specific value is assigned, for example: 0003, is
indicated as XXXX, 0000 or nnnn, meaning any value applies .
Figure 5-1
Error Code example
ERROR CODES: 0201 XXXX; 0302 00F4;...
In these examples, the LEDs being observed are on the Digital Control board
of the Scanner. The first two digits, 02, indicate that the failure is in module
02. Referring to information on Figure 4-1, Page 4-2 of Chapter 4 (RST), you
see that module 02 corresponds to the Digital Control board.
In the second example, module 03 refers to the Transmit Power Supply

board.
The second set of two digits, 01 and 02 respectively in these examples,

denotes the submodule that has failed. This information is rarely of practical
value in the field because it indicates a group of components or cluster within
a module that may not be repaired in the field. The list of submodule
numbers associated with a module may be found on Figures 4-2 through 4-4
of Chapter 4.
5-3
Error Codes
5-4
5 KRST - Keyprocessor Electronics
Resident Test
Error Code Failure Data Additional Information
0101 0000 [KP:K1] A/D high reference failure.
0101 0001 [KP:K1] A/D low reference failure.
0102 0001 [KP:K1] video RAM failure.
0103 0000 [KP:K1] right display & driver failure.
0103 1000 [KP:K1] left display & driver failure.
0104 0000 [KP:K1] reset flag failure.
0104 0001 [KP:K1] reset flag failure.
0105 0000 [RTP:K8] right touch panel failure. Also try KP:K1
0105 0009 [RTP:K8] right touch panel failure. Also try KP: K1
0105 000A [RTP:K8] right touch panel failure. Also try KP:K1
5K-1
KRST - Keyprocessor Electronics
Resident Test
0105 000B [RTP:K8] right touch panel failure. Also try KP:K1
0105 000C [RTP:K8] right touch panel failure. Also try KP:K1
0105 000D [RTP:K8] right touch panel failure. Also try KP:K1
0105 1000 [LTP:K8] left touch panel failure. Also try KP:K1
0105 100A [LTP:K8] left touch panel failure. Also try KP:K1
0105 100B [LTP:K8] left touch panel failure. Also try KP: K1
0105 100C [LTP:K8] left touch panel failure. Also try KP: K1
0105 100D [LTP:K8] left touch panel failure. Also try KP: K1
0106 0002 [KP:K1] readback register failure. Duart # 1 failed.
0109 0001 [KP:K1] vcr frame counter failure.
0109 0002 [KP:K1] vcr frame counter failure.
5K-2
Resident Test
0109 0004 [KP:K1] vcr frame counter decrement

failure.
010A 0000 [KP:K1] color D/A signal error.
010A 0001 [KP:K1] color D/A signal error.
010A 1000 [KP:K1] Hue D/A signal error.
010A 1001 [KP:K1] Hue D/A signal error.
010A 2000 [KP:K1] right EL panel brightness fail-

ure.
010A 2001 [KP:K1] right EL panel brightness fail-

ure.
010A 3000 [KP:K1] left EL panel brightness failure.
010A 3001 [KP:K1] left EL panel brightness failure.
010B 0001 [KP:K1] audio gain failure.
010B 0010 [KP:K1] audio offset failure.
010C 0001 [KP:K1] switch matrix failure.
0201 0000 [PH:K2] data bus failure.
0201 0001 [PH:K2] data bus failure.
5K-3
Resident Test
0202 0000 [PH:K2] ecg zero offset failure.
0202 0001 [PH:K2] ecg positive offset failure.
0202 0002 [PH:K2] ecg negative offset failure.
0202 0003 [PH:K2] ecg zero signal level failure.
0202 0004 [PH:K2] ecg positive gain failure.
0202 0005 [PH:K2] ecg negative gain failure.
0202 1000 [PH:K2] ecg r-wave zero level failure.
0202 1001 [PH:K2] ecg r-wave high level failure.
0202 1002 [PH:K2] ecg r-wave reset zero level

failure.
0203 0000 [PH:K2] respiration zero offset failure.
0203 0001 [PH:K2] respiration positive offset fail-

ure.
0203 0002 [PH:K2] respiration negative offset fail-

ure.
0203 0003 [PH:K2] respiration zero signal level

failure.
0203 0004 [PH:K2] respiration positive gain fail-

ure.
0203 0005 [PH:K2] respiration negative gain fail-

ure.
0204 0000 [PH:K2] pulse zero offset failure.
0204 0001 [PH:K2] pulse positive offset failure.
0204 0002 [PH:K2] pulse negative offset failure.
0205 0000 [PH:K2] heartsound zero offset failure.
0205 0001 [PH:K2] heartsound positive offset fail-

ure.
5K-4
Resident Test
0205 0002 [PH:K2] heartsound negative offset

failure.
0205 0003 [PH:K2] heartsound zero signal level

failure.
5K-5
Resident Test
5K-6
5 ERST - Scanner Error Codes
Resident Test
0201 0001 [DC:B14] Bus read error.
0201 0002 [DC:B14] Bus write error.
0202 0001 [DC:B14] Line timer failure.
0203 0001 [DC:B14] Frame table RAM failure.
0204 0001 [DC:B14] Tap RAM failure.
0205 0020 [DC:B14] Timer function failure.
0206 0001 [DC:B14] Frame table function failure.
5E-1
ERST - Scanner Error Codes
Resident Test
0206 000A [DC:B14] Frame table function failure.
0206 000B [DC:B14] Frame table function failure.
0206 000C [DC:B14] Frame table function failure.
0206 000D [DC:B14] Frame table function failure.
0206 000E [DC:B14] Frame table function failure.
0207 0001 [DC:B14] Tap function failure.
0208 0001 [DC:B14] MAC RAM test failure.
5E-2
Resident Test
0209 0001 [DC:B14] TGC RAM test failure.
0301 nnnn [ID:A13] A/D failure. Also try DD:A12 and

DC:B14.
0302 0000 [XPS:A8] +9V failure.
0302 0001 [XPS:A8] +10.5V failure.
0302 0002 [XPS:A8] -15V fails at -13V or control regis- Unable to program -15V.
ter failure.
0302 0003 [XPS:A8] -90V fails at -53V.
0302 0004 [XPS:A8] -180V fails at -150V.
0302 0005 [XPS:A8] Charge dump failure. Also try DC:B14.
0302 0007 [XPS:A8] 2.5V reference failure.
0302 0008 [XPS:A8] CFI filter failure.
0302 000D [XPS:A8] Left connector high voltage bias

failure.
0302 0012 [XPS:A8] -15V fails at -5V.
0302 0016 [XPS:A8] TEE Overtemp failure. Readback register failure.
0302 001D [XPS:A8] Right connector high voltage bias Check right connector.
failure.
0302 0022 [XPS:A8] -15V fails at -10V.
0302 0026 [XPS:A8] Thermister failure. Readback register failure.
5E-3
Resident Test
0302 002D [XPS:A8] VNN to left connector failure.
0302 0036 [XPS:A8] Thermistor failure. Readback register failure.
0302 003D [XPS:A8] VNN to right connector failure.
0302 0046 [XPS:A8] TEE voltage failure. Readback register failure.
0302 004D [XPS:A8] Left connector high voltage bias

failure.
0302 0056 [XPS:A8] TEE voltage failure. Readback register failure.
0302 005D [XPS:A8] Right connector high voltage bias

failure.
0302 10F2 [XPS:A8] -15V failure. Try pass transistor

before replacing XPS to avoid damage.


0303 0001 [PVPS:A9] Mux power supply failure.
0304 000n [PVPS:A9] Digital data path failure.
0305 0001 [PVPS:A9] VNN power-up sequence failure.
0305 0002 [PVPS:A9] VPP power-up sequence failure.
5E-4
Resident Test
0305 0003 [PVPS:A9] Vselect power-up sequence fail-

ure.
0305 000A [PVPS:A9] Vselect power-up sequence fail-

ure.
0305 000B [PS:A9] Vselect power-up sequence failure.
0305 000C [PVPS:A9] Vselect power-up sequence fail-

ure.
0305 000D [PVPS:A9] Vselect power-on sequence fail-

ure.
0305 000E [PVPS:A9] VPP power-up sequence failure.

ure.
0305 001A [PVPS:A9] VNN power-up sequence failure.
0305 001B [PVPS:A9] VPP power-up sequence failure.
0305 001C [PVPS:A9] VPP power-up sequence failure.
0305 001D [PVPS:A9] Vselect power-up sequence fail-

ure.
0305 001E [PVPS:A9] Vselect power-up sequence fail-

ure.
5E-5
Resident Test
0305 001F [PVPS:A9] Vselect power-up sequence fail-

ure.

ure.
0306 0000 [PVPS:A9] A/D failure.
0306 10nn [PVPS:A9] Motor control voltage failure.
0306 0077 [PVPS:A9] Motor current sense readback

failure.
0306 0080 [PVPS:A9] A/D failure.
0306 0090 [PVPS:A9] Motor control +5V failure.
0306 0091 [PVPS:A9] Motor control -5V failure.
0306 20nn [PVPS:A9] Motor control voltage failure.
0401 0000 [ID:A13] IF1 1.4 MHz readback register

failed.

failed.

failed.

failed.

failed.
0401 0008 [ID:A13] Readback register failure. TM/SEC bit.
5E-6
Resident Test
0401 000A [ID:A13] Readback register failure. IDTEST bit.
0401 000B [ID:A13] Readback register failure. IDTEST bit.
0401 000C [ID:A13] Readback register failure. STDFILT bit.
0401 000D [ID:A13] Readback register failure. STDFILT bit.
0401 000E [ID:A13] Readback register failure. OVERTEMP bit.
0401 000F [ID:A13] Readback register failure. CLEANFIL Chek filters &
fan.
0401 1000 [ID:A11] Readback register failure. IF1 1.4 MHz.
0401 2000 [ID:A13] Readback register 1 failure. IF2 2.0 MHz.
0402 00FF [ID:A13] Phase detector offset failure. Also try TGC:B13.
5E-7
Resident Test
0402 nnnn [ID:A13] Phase detector failure. Also try TGC:B13.
0403 0001 [ID:A13] 3.1 MHz sector filter failure. IF1 3.1 MHz.
0403 000F [ID:A13] 2.1 MHz filter failure. IF1 2.1 MHz.
0403 0011 [ID:A13] 3.5 MHz filter failure. IF2 3.5 MHz.
0403 201F [ID:A13] TGC gain adjust failure. Try also B13:TGC.
0403 00CE [ID:A13] Contrast enhancement filter Filter failure.
0403 00FF [ID:A13] 2.5 MHz sector filter failure. IF2 2.5 MHz.
0403 100F [ID:A11] 2.1 MHz filter failure. IF1 2.1 MHz.
0403 301F [ID:A11] TGC gain failure. Try also B13:TGC.
0403 10FF [ID:A11] 2.5 MHz filter failure. IF2 2.5 MHz.
5E-8
Resident Test
0404 0000 [ID:A13] 2.0 MHz M-mode filter failure.
0404 0003 [ID:A13] 3.5 MHz M-mode filter failure.
0404 00FF [ID:A13] 2.5 MHz M-mode filter failure.
0405 0001 [ID:A13] TGC offset failure (-6db).
0405 0002 [ID:A13] TGC offset failure (+6db).
0405 000F [ID:A13] TGC offset amplitude failure.
0405 1001 [ID:A11] TGC offset failure (-6db).
0405 1002 [ID:A11] TGC offset failure (+6db).
0405 100F [ID:A11] TGC offset amplitude failure.
0406 0001 [ID:A13] Logger failure.
0406 1001 [ID:A11] Logger failure.
0501 nnnn [TGC:B13] Apodization profile RAM failure.
0502 nnnn [TGC:B13] TGC RAM profile failure.
0503 000n [TGC:B13] Apodization Channel #0.
0504 nnnn [TGC:B13] 2.5 MHz clock failure.
0508 nnnn [TGC:B13] 10 MHz clock failure.
0509 00nn [TGC:B13] Composite TGC waveform failure. PTGC.
050A 00nn [TGC:B13] Rear TGC waveform failure. RTGC.
5E-9
Resident Test
050A 00F0 [TGC:B13] TGC 64 element aperture correc-

tion failure.
050A 00F1 [TGC:B13] TGC 96 element aperture correc-

tion failure.
050A 00F2 [TGC:B13] TGC 128 element aperture cor-

rection failure.
050B 0040 [TGC:B13] Front TGC failure. FTGC.
050B 0080 [TGC:B13] Front TGC failure. FTGC.
050C 0040 [TGC:B13] TGC bias failure.
050C 0080 [TGC:B13] TGC bias failure.
050D 10nn [TGC:B13] TGC static apodization failure. Chan 0.
050E 10nn [TGC:B13] TGC dynamic apodization failure.
050E 20nn [TGC:B13] TGC dynamic apodization failure.
050F nnnn [TGC:B13] 2.1 MHz clock failure.
0601 000n [CD:A7] Delay tap failure.
5E-10
Resident Test
0601 6000 [CD:A7] Amplitude failure. Also try TGC:B13.
0601 7000 [CD:A6] Amplitude failure.
0601 A000 [CD:A3] Amplitude failure.
0601 B000 [CD:A2] Amplitude failure.
0602 0001 [CD:A7] Tap switching failure.
0602 1001 [CD:A6] Tap switching failure. Also try XPS:A8.
0602 1002 [CD:A6] Tap switching failure. Also try XPS:A8.
0602 3001 [CD:A4] Tap switching failure. Also try ID:A13.
0602 6000 [CDs or XPS:A8] Multiple channel failure.
0602 6001 [CD or XPS:A8] Multiple channel failure.
0602 60F0 [CD:An] Many channel pairs bad. Suspect

Xmit pwr supply - Right receivers.
0602 60F1 [CD:An]Many channel pairs bad. Suspect

Xmit pwr supply - Left receivers.
0701 nnnn [FD:B1] MAC RAM failure.
5E-11
Resident Test
0705 10nn [FD:B1] Transmit control failure.
0705 00FE [FDs or TGC:B13] All delays failed. Suspect TGC or other FD.
0706 10nn [FD:B1] MAC transmit failure.
0706 40nn [FD:B12] MAC transmit failure. Also try CDs.
0707 10nn [FD:B1] MAC transmit failure. Also try CDs.
0707 200n [FD:B1] MAC transmit failure.
0708 0000 [FD:B1] Feathering failure. If 0708, 0709, 070A and 070B
all occur try XPS:A8.
5E-12
Resident Test
all occur try XPS, A8.
070A 0000 [FD:B11] Feathering failure. If 0708, 0709, 070A and 070B
5E-13
Resident Test
070B 0000 [FD:B12] Feathering failure. If 0708, 0709, 070A and 070B
070B 0013 FD:B12] Feathering failure. If 0708, 0709, 070A and 070B
5E-14
Resident Test
070C 0001 [FD:B1] Amplitude failure. Try also B13:TGC.
070C 1000 [FE:B3] Amplitude failure. Try also B13:TGC.
070C 2000 [FE:B4] Amplitude failure. Try also B13:TGC.
070C 5000 [FE:B3 and B4] Amplitude failure. Try also B13:TGC.
070C 6000 [DB:B15] Distribution board failure. Also try XPS:A8.
070C 70nn [FD:B1] Amplitude failure. Also try TGC:B13.
070C 80nn [FE:B3] Amplitude failure. Also try TGC:B13.
070C 90nn [FE:B4] Amplitude failure. Chan nn.
070C A000 [FD:B1] Phase failure.
070C B0nn [FD:B1] Phase failure. Chan nn.
070C C0nn [DB:B15] Left connector failure.
070C D0nn [DB:B15] Right connector failure.
070D 0001 [FD:B2] Amplitude failure.
070D 1000 [FE:B5] Amplitude test.
070D 2000 [FE:B6] Amplitude failure.
070D 5000 [FE:B5 and B6] Amplitude failure.
070D 6000 [DB:B15] Distribution board failure.
070D 70nn [FD:B2] Amplitude failure.
070D 80nn [FE:B5] Amplitude failure.
070D 90nn [FE:B6] Amplitude failure.
5E-15
Resident Test
070D A000 [FD:B2] Phase failure.
070D B0nn [FD:B2] Phase failure. Chan nn.
070D C0nn [DB:B15] Left connector failure.
070D Dnn [DB:B15] Right connector failure.
070E 0001 [FD:B11] Amplitude failure.
070E 1000 [FE:B7] Amplitude failure.
070E 2000 [FE:B8] Amplitude failure.
070E 5000 [FE:B7 and B8] Amplitude failure.
070E 6000 [DB:B15] Distribution board failure.
070E 70nn [FD:B11] Amplitude failure.
070E 80nn [FE:B7] Amplitude failure.
070E 90nn [FE:B8] Amplitude failure.
070E A000 [FD:B11] Phase failure.
070E B0nn [FD:B11] Phase failure.
070E C0nn [DB:B15] Left connector failure.
070E D0nn [DB:B15] Right connector failure.
070F 0001 [FD:B12] Amplitude failure.
070F 1000 [FE:B9] Amplitude failure.
070F 2000 [FE:B10] Amplitude failure.
070F 5000 [FE:B9 and B10] Amplitude failure.
5E-16
Resident Test
070F 6000 [DB:B15] Distribution board failure.
070F 70nn [FD:B12] Amplitude failure.
070F 80nn [FE:B9] Amplitude failure.
070F 90nn [FE:B10] Amplitude failure.
070F A000 [FD:B12] Phase failure.
070F B0nn [FD:B12] Phase failure.
070F C0nn [DB:B15] Left connector failure.
070F D0nn [DB:B15] Right connector failure.
0710 10nn [FD:B1, FE:B3 or B4] Low signal failure.
0710 50nn [FD:B1, FE:B3 or B4, TGC:B13] Channel fail-

ure.

ure.

ure.
0710 80nn [FD:B12, FE:B9 or B10, TGC:B13] Channel

failure.

ure.
0710 A0nn [FD:B2, FE:B5 or B6, TGC:B13] Channel fail-

ure.
0710 B0nn [FD:B11, FE:B7 or B8, TGC:B13] Channel fail-

ure.
0710 C0nn [FD:B12, FE:B9 or B10, TGC:B13] Channel

failure.
5E-17
Resident Test
0711 0000 [FD:B1] Gain control failure.
0711 A000 [FD:B11] Gain control failure.
0711 B000 [FD:B12] Gain control failure.
0713 10nn [FD:B1] Tractor treading failure.
0714 0001 [FD:B1] Amplitude failure.
0714 1000 [FE:B3] Amplitude failure.
5E-18
Resident Test
0714 5000 [FE:B3 and B4] Amplitude failure.
0714 6000 [DB:B15] Distribution board failure.
0714 70nn [FD:B1] Amplitude failure.
0714 80nn [FE:B3] Amplitude failure.
0714 A000 [FD:B1] Phase failure.
0714 B0nn [FD:B1] Phase failure.
0714 C0nn [DB:B15] Left connector failure.
0714 D0nn [DB:B15] Right connector failure.
5E-19
Resident Test
0716 6000 [FD:B15] Distribution failure. Distribution board failure
5E-20
Resident Test
5E-21
Resident Test
0719 D0nn [BD:B15] Right connector failure.
071A 0001 [FD:B11] Amplitude failure.
071A 1000 [FE:B7] Amplitude failure.
071A 2000 [FE:B8] Amplitude failure.
071A 5000 [FE:B7 and B8] Amplitude failure.
071A 6000 [DB:B15] Distribution board failure.
071A 70nn [FD:B11] Amplitude failure.
071A 80nn [FE:B7] Amplitude failure.
071A 90nn [FE:B8] Amplitude failure.
071A A000 [FD:B11] Phase failure.
071A B0nn [FD:B11] Phase failure.
071A C0nn [DB:B15] Left connector failure.
071A D0nn [DB:B15] Right connector failure.
071B 0001 [FD:B12] Amplitude failure.
071B 1000 [FE:B9] Amplitude failure.
5E-22
Resident Test
071B 2000 [FE:B10] Amplitude failure.
071B 5000 [FE:B9 and B10] Amplitude failure.
071B 6000 [DB:B15] Distribution board failure.
071B 70nn [FD:B12] Amplitude failure.
071B 80nn [FE:B9] Amplitude failure.
071B 90nn [FE:B10] Amplitude failure.
071B A000 [FD:B12] Phase failure.
071B B0nn [FD:B12] Phase failure.
071B C0nn [DB:B15] Left connector failure.
071B D0nn [DB:B15] Right connector failure.
071C 10nn [FD:B1] Aperture circuit failure.
0801 10nn [FD:B1, FE:B3] Driver failure.
5E-23
Resident Test
0801 00FE [TGC:B13, XPS:A8] Driver failure. All channels are bad.
0802 10nn [FE:B3] 2.5 MHz filter failure.
5E-24
Resident Test
0806 00nn [FE:B3] Summing gain failure. Chan # nn.
0806 01nn [FE:B3] Gain failure.
0806 10nn [FE:B4] Summing gain failure. Chan # nn.
0806 15nn [FE:B4 Gain failure.
5E-25
Resident Test
0807 00nn [FE:B3] Parallel gain switching error. Chan # nn.
5E-26
Resident Test
0901 nnnn [DD:A12] Doppler circuitry failure.
0902 nnnn [DD:A12] Doppler CW and PW circuitry fail-

ure.
0903 nnnn [DD:A12] Doppler color flow circuitry failure.
5E-27
Resident Test
5E-28
5 DRST - Scan Converter Error Codes
Resident Test
0101 0000 [PG:C1] Static RAM failure.
0104 0000 [PG:C1] DUART communication failure.
0105 0000 [PG:C1] DUART communication failure.
0106 0000 [PG:C1] Bus communication error. Check all Scan Converter
boards.
0107 0000 [PG:C1] Real time clock failure. Also check battery.
0108 0000 [PG:C1] Static RAM failure. CMOS

excluded.
0109 0000 [PG:C1] CMOS failure. Also check battery.
010A 0000 [PG:C1] DUART communication failure.
0111 0000 [PG:C1] LED display failure.
0201 0000 [PVT:C5] Video timing failure.
0301 0000 [IM:C7] Post-processing lookup table fail-

ure.
0302 0000 [IM:C7] Video image memory failure.
0306 0000 [IM:C7] Video image memory erase mode

failure.
0307 0000 [IM:C7] Internal transfer mode failure.
0308 0000 [IM:C7] Processor dual write mode fail-

ure.
0309 0000 [IM:C7] Bus grab mode failure.
5D-1
DRST - Scan Converter Error Codes
Resident Test
0310 0000 [IM:C7] Color persistence failure.
0311 0000 [IM:C7] Video memory image failure.
0312 0000 [IM:C7] Post-processing lookup table fail-

ure.
0313 0000 [IM:C7] Color persistence failure.
0401 0000 [PVT:C5] B&W memory failure.
0402 0000 [PVT:C5] Color memory failure.Color 9-bit

portion of PVT Memory failure detected.
0403 0000 [PVT:C5] Physio Memory failure.
0404 0000 [PVT:C5] M-mode/Doppler post-process-

ing failure.
0405 0000 [PVT:C5] Communications failure.
0406 0000 [PVT:C5] Post-processing failure.
0407 0000 [PVT:C5] Autovector failure.
0408 0000 [PVT:C5] M-mode/Doppler window, M-

mode filtering, 6/8 bit operation failure.
0409 0000 [PVT:C5] A/D converter failure.
0410 01 [PVT:C5] Local CPU Interrupt failure. Local CPU not running.
0410 02 [PVT:C5] Local CPU interrupt failure.
0411 0000 [PVT:C5] PVT interrupt failure.
5D-2
Resident Test
0412 0000 [PVT:C5] Video bus failure. Tests physio overlay, bor-
der and M-Mode window.
0413 0000 [PVT:C5] Autovector failure.
0414 0000 [PVT:C5] M-mode/Doppler input failure.
0415 0000 [PVT:C5] ROM checksum failure. Verify correct part num-
bers.
0501 0000 [PG:C1] Video or priority interface failure.
0503 0000 [PG:C1] Video processor failure.
0504 0000 [PG:C1] Graphics failure.
0505 0000 [PG:C1] Priority RAM failure
0506 0000 [PG:C1] Video path failure. Also try [IM:C7], [PVT:C5]
0601 0000 [RT:C9] Processor interface failure.
0602 0000 [RT:C9] B&W persistence failure.
0603 0000 [RT:C9] B&W persistence failure.
0604 0000 [RT:C9] B&W persistence memory failure.
0605 0000 [RT:C9] Drawing state machine failure.
0606 0000 [RT:C9] CRAM failure.
0607 0000 [RT:C9] Drawing state machine failure.
0608 0000 [RT:C9] Scan conversion failure. Also try [IM:C7].
0609 0000 [RT:C9] Sequence table or input line

counter failure.
060A 0000 [RT:C9] Radial scan conversion failure. Also try [IM:C7].
060B 0000 [RT:C9] Lateral scan conversion failure. Also try [IM:C7].
060C 0000 [RT:C9] Interpolation failure. Also try [IM:C7].
060D 0000 [RT:C9] Scan conversion data path failure. Also try [IM:C7].
5D-3
Resident Test
060E 0000 [RT:C9] B&W acoustic buffer failure. Also try [IM:C7].
060F 0000 [RT:C9] Flow acoustic buffer failure. Also try [IM:C7].
0610 0000 [RT:C9] B&W persistence weight table Also try [IM:C7].
failure.
0611 0000 [RT:C9] Color line spacing failure. Also try [IM:C7].
0612 0000 [RT:C9] Miscellaneous feature or sector Also try [IM:C7].

failure.
0613 0000 [RT:C9] Extended flow failure. Also try [IM:C7].
0614 0000 [RT:C9] Extended persistence failure.
0615 0000 [RT:C9] Lateral averaging error. Also try [IM:C7].
0701 0000 [VIO:C4] Processor access failure.
0702 0000 [VIO:C4] Red B&W lookup table failure.
0703 0000 [VIO:C4] Green B&W lookup table failure.
0704 0000 [VIO:C4] Blue B&W lookup table failure.
0705 0000 [VIO:C4] Red color lookup table failure.
0706 0000 [VIO:C4] Green color lookup table failure.
0707 0000 [VIO:C4] Blue color lookup table failure.
0708 0000 [VIO:C4] Threshold map data failure.
0709 0000 [VIO:C4] Adder and carry bit failure.
070A 0000 [VIO:C4] D/A converter error.
070B 0000 [VIO:C4] Red RAM border value failure.
070C 0000 [VIO:C4] Phase lock loop failure. Also try [PVT:C5].
0730 0000 [VI0:C4] PAL/NTSC mismatch.
0731 0000 [VI0:C4] Green video level failure.
0732 0000 [VI0:C4] Blue video level failure.
5D-4
Resident Test
0733 0000 [VI0:C4] Red video level failure.
0734 0000 [VI0:C4] VTR to Fine failure.
0735 0000 [VI0:C4] Svhs luma video failure.
0736 0000 [VI0:C4] Svhs chroma signal failure.
0737 0000 [VI0:C4] Std vhs composite signal failure.
0738 0000 [VI0:C4] VCR playback failure.
0739 0000 [VI0:C4] Loss of color on playback failure.
073A 0000 [VI0:C4] Loss of color on record failure.
0801 0000 [SIO:C14] cannot initialize Xilinx.
0801 0050 [S10:C14] Local OSC Switch in cal mode.
0802 0000 [SIO:C14] Gain cal. FIFO memory.
0803 0000 [SIO:C14] Compression RAM error.
0804 0000 [SIO:C14] Sample rate generator failure.
0805 0000 [SIO:C14] A/D failure.
0806 0000 [SIO:C14] 2D data path error.
0807 0000 [SIO:C14] Color data path error.
0808 0000 [SIO:C14] M-mode data path failure.
0809 0000 [SIO:C14] Moving average failure.
080A 0000 [SIO:C14] Gain cal failure.
080B 0000 [SIO:C14] SIO to rtheta interface failure.
0901 0000 [B&W CLR:C2] B&W CLR register read/

write failure.
0902 0000 [B&W CLR:C2] B&W CLR failure.
0A01 0000 [C CLR:C3] Color CLR register read/write

failure.
5D-5
Resident Test
0A02 0000 [C CLR:C3] Color CLR failure.
0A03 0000 [C CLR:C3] VCR analog failure.
0A04 0000 [C CLR:C3] Look up Table error.
0A05 0000 [C CLR:C3] DRAM Memory error.
0A06 0000 [C CLR:C3] Green ROM error.
0B01 0000 [FP:C11] MAC multiplier failure. Also compression ROM.
0B02 0000 [FP:C11] MAC accumulator failure. Also compression ROM.
0B03 0000 [FP:C11] Compression ROM failure.
0B04 0000 [FP:C11] Magnitude normalizer shifter fail-

ure.
0B05 0000 [FP:C11] Magnitude ROM failure.
0B06 0000 [FP:C11] Weighting ROM failure.
0B07 0000 [FP:C11] Max Mag Accum or compression

failure.
0B08 0000 [FP:C11] Packet velocity ROM failure
0B09 0000 [FP:C11] Packet velocity or subtracter fail-

ure.
0B0A 0000 [FP:C11] Zero Turbulence failure.
0B0C 0000 [FP:C11] Velocity theta filter failure. Negative velocities.
0B0D 0000 [FP:C11] Velocity theta filter failure. Positive velocities.
0B12 0000 [FP:C11] Timing generator failure.
0B13 0000 [FP:C11] Turbulence failure.
0B14 0000 [FP:C11] Normalizer magnitude failure.
0B15 0000 [FP:C11] Theta shifter failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,
IM:C7].
5D-6
Resident Test
0B16 0000 [FP:C11] Theta ROM failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,
IM:C7].
0B17 0000 [FP:C11] Velocity ROM failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,
IM:C7].
0B18 0000 [FP:C11] Turbulence radial filter error. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,
IM:C7].
0B19 0000 [FP:C11] Velocity radial filter error. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,
IM:C7].
0B1A 0000 [FP:C11] Reject failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,

IM:C7].
0B1B 0000 [FP:C11] Reject failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,

IM:C7].
0B1C 0000 [FP:C11] Normalizer failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,

IM:C7].
0B1D 0000 [FP:C11] Sable failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,

IM:C7].
0B1E 0000 [FP:C11] Sable failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,

IM:C7].
0B1F 0000 [FP:C11] Sable failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,

IM:C7].
0B20 0000 [FP:C11] Sable failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,

IM:C7].
0B21 0000 [FP:C11] Sable failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,

IM:C7].
0B23 0000 [FP:C11] Flash reject failure. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,
IM:C7].
0B24 0000 [FP:C11] Adaptive flash rejection error. Also try [SIO:C14, RT:C9,
IM:C7].
0C01 0000 [DP:C13] Memory or read/write failure.
0C02 0000 [DP:C13] I/O mailbox path failure.
5D-7
Resident Test
0C03 0000 [DP:C13] Memory interface failure.
0C04 0000 [DP:C13] Digital or analog data path fail-

ure.
0C05 0000 [DP:C13] A/D sample rate or switched

capacitor clock generator failure.
0C06 0000 [DP:C13] Spectral or waveform D/A con-

verter failure.
0C07 0000 [DP:C13] Analog FFT, audio or rotational

filter failure.
0D01 0000 [AQ:C8] Timing/threshold failure.
0D02 0000 [AQ:C8] Grey scale failure.
0D03 0000 [AQ:C8] Region of Interest failure.
0D04 0000 [AQ:C8] D/A to A/D failure.
0D05 0000 [AQ:C8] Signal processing loop failure.
0D06 0000 [AQ:C8] Region of Interest failure.
0D07 0000 [AQ:C8] Blood accumulator failure.
0D08 0000 [AQ:C8] Interrupt timer failure.
0E01 0000 [DSR:C12] SCSI processor communica-

tions failure.
0E02 0000 [DSR:C12] Interrupt sequence failure.
0E03 0000 [DSR:C12] Mailbox failure.
0E04 0000 [DSR:C12] RAM failure.
0E05 0000 [DSR:C12] Hardware file control buffer

failure.
0E06 0000 [DSR:C12] Backbone direct memory Also try [IM:C7].

access failure.
0E07 0000 [DSR:C12] Compression failure.
5D-8
Resident Test
0E08 0000 [DSR:C12] Expansion buffer failure.
0E09 0000 [DSR:C12] Compression DMA failure.
0E0A 0000 [DSR:C12] Disk store/retrieve failure. (A formatted, initialized

disk must be loaded).
0E0B 0000 [DSR:C12] Post-processing Remaster/ Also try [IM:C7]. (A for-

retrieve failure. matted, initialized disk
must be loaded).
0E0C 0000 [DSR:C12] Checksum failure. Also check DSR cabling.
0E0D 0000 DSR:C12] Compression failure. (A formatted, initialized

disk must be loaded).
0E0E 0000 [DSR:C12] Disk store failure. Also try [B&W CLR:C2]. (A
formatted, initialized disk
must be loaded).
0E0F 0000 [DSR:C12] Mailbox failure.
0E10 0000 [DSR:C12 Expansion DMA failure. (A formatted, initialized

disk is required).
0E11 0000 [DSR:C12] Expansion failure. (A formatted, initialized

disk is required).
0E12 0000 [DSR:C12] Fast Retrieve/Fast Store failure. Also try [B&W CLR:C2].
(A formatted, initialized
disk is required).
0E13 0000 [DSR:C12] Mailbox failure.
0E14 0000 [DSR:C12] Software failure.
0E15 0000 [DSR:C12] Hardware failure.
0F01 0000 [SC:C6] RAM core test failure.
0F02 0000 [SC:C6] Interrupt circuit failure.
0F03 0000 [SC:C6] RAM basic test failure.
0F04 0000 [SC:C6] Character RAM failure.
5D-9
Resident Test
0F05 0000 [SC:C6] Mark RAM failure.
0F06 0000 [SC:C6] Greyscale RAM failure.
0F07 0000 [SC:C6] Timing RAM failure.
0F08 0000 [SC:C6] Trident circuit failure.
0F09 0000 [SC:C6] DAC circuit failure.
0F0A 0000 [SC:C6] Paper speed circuit failure. Check KOWA cable.
0F0B 0000 [SC:C6] Sweep ramp circuit failure.
1F01 00 Error in backend portion of transducer dot R-Theta timed out while
test. Usually a bus error. D1F01 80 Error in drawing.
backend portion of transducer dot test.
1F01 40 Error in backend portion of transducer dot Illegal transducer type in

test. RAM table.
1F02 0000 Failure while sending CMOS RAM to AUX

Serial port.
1F03 01 Error while loading CMOS RAM from the

AUX SERIAL port.

AUX SERIAL port.

AUX SERIAL port.

AUX SERIAL port.

AUX SERIAL port.

AUX SERIAL port.

AUX SERIAL port.
5D-10
Resident Test

AUX SERIAL port.

AUX SERIAL port.
1F03 0A Error while loading CMOS RAM from the

AUX SERIAL port.
1F03 0B Error while loading CMOS RAM from the

AUX SERIAL port.
1F03 FF Error while loading CMOS RAM from the

AUX SERIAL port.
5D-11
Resident Test
5D-12
5 Run Time Error Codes
Run Time Errors

Whenever a Run Time Error is detected while the system is in normal
operation, the error will be displayed: (1) on the screen with a message,
(2) on a subsystem LED and (3) in the Runtime Error Log.
The Run Time Error code consists of five characters. Sometimes a second set
of four characters is displayed to give additional meaning to the error.
Run Time Error Code Example: EDEC4 0001
The first character of the code identifies the subsystem. In this example,
E identifies the Scanner subsystem.
K = Keyprocessor
E = Scanner
D = Scan Converter
The second character of the code identifies the type of failure. In this
example, D identifies that the error is recoverable.
D = Recoverable
E = Conditional
F = Non-recoverable
The next three characters identify the error code. Also, if a second set of
four characters appear after the error code, it becomes part of the error code.
In this example, EC4 0001 identifies the error as Missing Autocool option.
Use the table that follows to identify the error code.
5R-1
Run Time Error Codes
Run Time Errors
Error
Failure Data Additional Information
Code
000 RS-232 Scanner to Scan Converter communi-

cations failure.
001 RS-232 Scanner to Scan Converter communi-

cations failure.
002 Control pressed not functional with Color.

Pressed a key not functional with color.
004 Control pressed not functional with loop.
006 Control pressed not functional with Full Screen

Report.
015 Tape is rewinding. Stop tape and try again.
034 Incorrect DP version installed. [DP:C13].
06A Software or Hardware error (CMOS pointer out

of range.)
06B CMOS memory initialized to default values.

Check battery or [PG:C1].
06C CMOS error. Check battery or [PG:C1].
06D Hardware configuration has been changed.

Restore original hardware configuration or
clear and restore CMOS.
06E CMOS battery backed memory checksum

error. Check battery or [PG:C1].
06F Analysis CMOS checksum error. Check battery

or [PG:C1].
073 Invalid control was pressed.
5R-2
Run Time Errors
076 Maximum number of trace dots reached. Press

Enter to complete trace, or Erase to remove
dots.
07A Software or Hardware error (Bad column

number.)
07B Software or Hardware error (Bad text entry

control code.)
080 Volume measurement incomplete.Press Enter

to complete trace, and press Store EF Vol.
Pressed STORE EF VOL without completing the
volume measurement.
081
082 Cannot make measurements in this mode.
083 Annotation text too long. Perform a Move or

Delete function.
085 Annotation not allowed.
087 Printing. Please wait.... While the printer was

printing, the user tried to configure the printer
or make another print.
090 [SIO:C14] Clock toggle switch set to internal

clock. Change to external clock.
091 System not communicating with printer. Turn

printer on and press Reset. Communication
with the Sony printer has failed. Check RS-232
cable. Check power. Reset system.
092 System not communicating with printer. Turn

printer on and press Reset. Communication
with the Sony printer has failed. Check RS-232
cable. Check power. Reset system.
093 Unexpected response from the Sony printer.

Try resetting system.
094 Sony printer communications. failure. Try

resetting system. Check power.
5R-3
Run Time Errors
095 Unable to print. Check paper tray and ribbon

cassette.

cassette. Sony printer communications failure.
Try resetting system. Check power.
097 Software or Hardware error (Scanio gaincal

fifo error.)

cassette. Sony printer error.
099 Control pressed not allowed in quick review.
09A Software error.
09B System not communicating with printer. Turn

printer on and press Reset.
09C Some receive data from Sony printer was lost.

Reset system.
09D Sony and system think different number of

quad prints have been captured. Reset system.
0BD Backdoor enabled. To disable backdoor set PG

switch 6 off (down).
0BE Factory mode enabled. Cannot continue scan-

ning. Contact your HP service representative.
0BF Cache disabled. To enable cache, set PG

switch 10 off (switch 2 on second bank down).
0C0 Software or Hardware error (Bad word

received.)
0E9 RS-232 Error (RS-232 relay out of free nodes.)
100 [VIO:C4] Incorrect video format for system

(NTSC versus PAL).
101 Control pressed is not allowed during loop

Compare.
104 Image currently printing. Pressed CHART key

during FRAME record.
5R-4
Run Time Errors
105 Image currently printing. Trying to use CHART

footswitch during FRAME record.
109 Strip chart recorder currently printing.
10A Strip chart recorder currently printing.
10B Cannot use strip chart in Color mode.
111 Software error or [PG:C1] Unexpected DUART

2 interrupt received.
117 Software or Hardware error (Divide by zero in

calibration cvt factor.)
130 Software or Hardware error (DSR incorrectly

called Cine.)
131 Software or Hardware error (Bad DSR storage

algorithm.)
133 Software or Hardware error (Invalid loop ID.)
134 Software or Hardware error (Feature not

implemented.)
135 Software or Hardware error (Smart store

failure.)
136 Software or Hardware error (Cine bad smart

store mode.)
137 Software or Hardware error (Cine bad smart

store percentages.)
138 Software or Hardware error (Cine smart store

range.)
139 Software or Hardware error (Cine bad

parameter.)
13A Software or Hardware error (Cine should not

have reached this point.)
13B Software or Hardware error (No ABD loops

stored in Cine.)
13C Software or Hardware error Cine illegal state.
5R-5
Run Time Errors
13D Software or Hardware error (Cine control

region enter.)
13E Software or Hardware error Cine SCSI error.
13F Software or Hardware error (Cine CPU bin

overflow.)
140 0001 Cannot edit an empty loop.
140 0002 End point cannot precede start point.
140 0003 End point of loop reached.
140 0004 Start point cannot exceed end point.
140 0005 Multiple loops required.
140 0006 Cannot edit multiple loops.
140 0007 Start point of loop reached.
140 0008 Loop is being retrieved. Please wait...
140 0009 Must finish processing Loop before exiting.

Please wait...
140 No frames available for quick review.

000A
140 Cannot scroll further in this direction.

000B
140 000C Cannot scroll further in this direction.
140 Quick review available in full screen format

000D only.
140 000E Loop memory full.
140 000F Quick review not supported for VCR data.
140 0010 Text entry not allowed.
151 Software or Hardware error (Requested dialog

box too wide.)
152 Software or Hardware error (Analysis

requested invalid mod conversion.)
5R-6
Run Time Errors
180 System/Disk error occurred. Press Reset.
181 System/Disk error occurred. Press Reset.
181 300C Disk not responding. Please try again, or con-

tact your HP service representative.
181 3018 Disk not responding. Please try again, or con-

tact your HP service representative.
181 3134 Network Interface error. Reset recommended.
183 System/Disk error occurred. Please try again.
183 2005 Maximum number of files stored. Delete file(s)

or change sides/disk.
183 2007 File does not exist. First check file name. If
needed, run Rebuild Database.
183 Disk is full. Delete unwanted file(s) and try

200A again.
183 2010 Disk not properly inserted. Check disk and try
again.
183 2011 Disk is damaged. Format Disk recommended.
183 2015 Disk is write-protected.
183 2039 Unrecognizable disk format. Initialize Disk

recommended.
183 Unrecognizable disk format. Initialize Disk

203B recommended.
183 File damaged. Cannot perform requested

203D operation.
183 2100 Disk and/or loop busy. Wait until function

finishes and try again.
183 2105 File damaged. Cannot perform requested

operation.
183 2108 Incompatible loop format. Change loop format

setting and try again.
183 File damaged. Cannot perform requested

210D operation.
5R-7
Run Time Errors
183 210E Inconsistencies in database. Rebuild Database

recommended.
183 2117 Incompatible video format. Cannot retrieve file.
183 2118 Incompatible file format. Cannot retrieve file.
183 2119 Disk not ready. Please try again.
183 2200 Incompatible loop format. Change loop format

setting and try again.
183 2201 Loop memory full. Delete unwanted loop(s) and

try again.
183 2202 Disk and/or loop busy. Wait until function fin-
ishes and try again.
183 2203 Loop too long for quad screen format. Use For-
mat Full or Format Split.
183 2300 No files found on disk.
183 2305 Cannot store still frame during Loop Acquire,

Loop Display or VCR play.
183 2306 Cannot retrieve still frame while in Loop Dis-

play or VCR Play.
183 2308 Multiple loops selected. Select one loop.
183 No Acoustic Densitometry files found.

230A
183 No files found for this application.

230B
184 Omni TEE transducer calibration failed.

Straighten transducer, and lift and lower lock-
ing bail. Contact your HP service representa-
tive.
184 Omni TEE transducer calibration failed.

Straighten transducer.Also check bail and
185 1104 Disk is full. Delete unwanted file(s) and try

again.
5R-8
Run Time Errors
185 Inconsistencies in database. Rebuild Database

110B recommended.
186 00xx Network Interface error during study creation.

Study has been saved on the hard disk, but will
not transfer to EIMS.
187 00xx Network Interface error during study transfer.

Study has been saved on the hard disk, but will
not transfer to EIMS.
188 00xx Network Interface error during End Study.

Study has been saved on the hard disk, but
study status on EIMS may be incorrect.
189 00xx Network Interface error during copy to optical.

File(s) did not copy.
192 Software or Hardware error (Doppler angle not

in range.)
193 Software or Hardware error (Invalid command

in DO command.)
196 System overheated. Turn system off and clean

all air filters. System overheated. Clean filters.
197 System temperature near upper limit. Clean all

air filters as soon as possible. System tempera-
ture near upper limit. Clean filters.
198 0071 Another user on the network is accessing the

hard disk. Study has been saved on the hard
disk, but will not transfer to EIMS.
19A Software or Hardware error (Wall filter not in

range.)
19C Software or Hardware error (Bad application

number in kscom.)
19D Software or Hardware error (Bad event num-

ber from resource manager.)
19E Software or Hardware error (Bad resource

number from resource manager.)
5R-9
Run Time Errors
201 0001 Software or Hardware error (Txgrmgr, max.

string length exceeded.)
201 0002 Software or Hardware error (Txgrmgr, null

string.)
201 0003 Software or Hardware error (Txgrmgr, max.

length exceeded.)
201 0004 Software or Hardware error (Txgrmgr, updated

string too long.)
202 Software or Hardware error (Bad type value in

text package.)
203 Software or Hardware error (Text package

unable to read marker.)
207 Software or Hardware error (Bad coordinates

to Text area.)
208 Software or Hardware error (Too many text

WM blocks.)
209 Software or Hardware error (Text manager

error.)
20A Software or Hardware error (Invalid argument

to MeasDisp update.)
20B Software or Hardware error (Invalid ID to

MeasDisp.)
20C Software or Hardware error (Invalid mode to

MeasDisp.)
20D Software or Hardware error (Invalid mask.)
20E Software or Hardware error (Invalid type/

scrnarea.)
20F Software or Hardware error (Bad wave argu-

ment to MeasDisp.)
254 Software or Hardware error (Bad field value.)
255 Bad character entered.
5R-10
Run Time Errors
256 Software or Hardware error (Higher applica-

tion in progress.)
258 Unable to respond to controls pressed. If

problem persists, contact your HP service
representative.
259 Analysis not available in this mode.
260 Measurements not allowed in this area.
261 Trace not entered. Press Enter to approve

trace.
262 One point measurements not allowed in this

area.
263 Control changes have been made. Measure-

ments invalid in this area.
264 Angle should be greater than 30 and less than

70 degrees.
265 Scan vessels larger than 3mm for better

accuracy.
266 Use greater zoom for better accuracy.
267 Focus at vessel depth for better accuracy.
268 Position scanline in center of image for better

accuracy.
269 CVI Software Sampling Error.
280 Check CLR switch. Requested more cine

memory than is available.
284 Software error. Data file too large for DSR.

Possible mismatch of DSR media.
287 Software error.
26A CVI Software generating too few samples.
276 Control pressed only valid in text entry.
30D (Software error or try in order [SIO:C14],

[FP:C11], [RT:C9].)
5R-11
Run Time Errors
30E (Software error or try in order [SIO:C14],

[FP:C11], [RT:C9].)
30F (Software error or try in order [SIO:C14],

[FP:C11], [RT:C9].)
330 Control pressed invalid in Annotation.
339 AQ processor communications failure. Check

[AQ:C8].
340 DSS processor communications failure. Check

[PG:C1].
342 Software or Hardware error (Illegal ack.)
343 AQ processor not responding. Check [AQ:C8].
347 Software or Hardware error (Unmatched ROI

start.)
348 Software or Hardware error (AQ ROI slope

divide by zero.)
356 AQ text label specified is unknown. Check

label.
359 Software or Hardware error (AQ processor

message specifying data type.)
364 Software or Hardware error (Border or image

width/position message.)
365 Software or Hardware error (Screen, scales or

minimum message.)
366 Software or Hardware error (AQ On message.)
367 Software or Hardware error (Waves On

message.)
368 Software or Hardware error (Volume data

message.)
369 Software or Hardware error (Resolution mes-

sage.)
5R-12
Run Time Errors
370 Software or Hardware error (Sector depth

message.)
371 Software or Hardware error (Number of sam-

ples on line message.)
372 Software or Hardware error (VSR message.)
373 Software or Hardware error (ROI data

message.)
391 Software or Hardware error (Data message.)
400 Software or Hardware error (Generic keyp.)
401 Software or Hardware error (IPC problems in

send dip.)
402 Software or Hardware error (Exceeded max.

number of unique IDs.)
403 Software or Hardware error (Interpret stim

xchg is not alive.)
404 Software or Hardware error (Cant disable

scan controls.)
410 Software or Hardware error (IPC problems in

send dip.)
411 Software or Hardware error (DFBACK invalid

command received.)
412 Software or Hardware error (DFBACK routines

table size mismatch.)
413 Software or Hardware error (DFBACK routines

table out of sequence.)
420 Software or Hardware error (EL dip operations

table size mismatch.)
421 Software or Hardware error (EL dip operations

422 Software or Hardware error (EL dip text rom

table mismatch.)
5R-13
Run Time Errors
423 Software or Hardware error (EL dip text ROM

424 Software or Hardware error (EL dip text index

array table mismatch.)
425 Software or Hardware error (EL dip text index

array ROM table out of sequence.)
426 Software or Hardware error (EL dip TU add

failed.)
427 Software or Hardware error (EL dip text ID

mismatch.)
428 Software or Hardware error (EL text ID out of

sequence.)
430 Touch panel calibration failed. Previous data

will be used until next calibration.
431 Touch calibration CMOS data invalid -

recalibrate.
432 Move Options ROM over in Keyprocessor.
433 Option ROM not programmed for that system.
500 Scanner software error.
510 Software or Hardware error (Reformat list is

full.)
512 Power supply out of regulation. Adjust gain

pot. Check transmit power supply.
515 Software or Hardware error (Aperture control

value invalid.)
516 Software or Hardware error (Access frame

table while scanning.)
517 Software or Hardware error (Options not

valid.)
518 Software or Hardware error (Incorrect param-

eters for the backdoor.)
5R-14
Run Time Errors
519 Software or Hardware error (Illegal parame-

ters passed into the routine.)
51A Software or Hardware error (Illegal addressing

in timer table.)
51B Software or Hardware error (Illegal size in

generic command.)
51C 0001 Software or Hardware error (Could not allo-

cate timer.)
51C 0002 Software or Hardware error (Illegal time ID or

not allocated.)
51C 0003 Software or Hardware error (Time manager

hung or not started.)
51D Software or Hardware error (Transducer capa-

bility parameter missing.)
51E Software or Hardware error (Coefficients not

valid.)
520 Reconnect the transducer, then press Reset. If

problem persists, contact your HP service rep-
resentative.
520 Thermistors in TEE transducer open. Check for

bent pins on the connector.
521 Cannot have two TEE transducers connected

at the same time.
522 One of the Biplane TEE transducer connectors

not properly inserted.
523 Reconnect the transducer, then press Reset.

If problem persists, contact your HP sevice
representative
523 TEE thermistor circuitry or [XPS;A8] failure.

Check for bent pins on the connector.
524 TEE thermistor failure. First check transducer

connector and adapter. Check for bent pins on
the connector.
5R-15
Run Time Errors
530 Check CDs for proper types, quantities and

locations.
535 Transducer not supported.
536 Software or Hardware error (Invalid power

data.)
537 Transducer is incompatible with the System

Hardware.
537 0001 This transducer not supported.
537 0002
537 0010 This transducer not supported. A 128 channel

system is needed to support this transducer.
537 0020 Vascular option required to support this

transducer.
537 0030 Pediatrics option required to support this

transducer.
537 0040 Curved linear option required to support this

transducer.
537 0050 Transcranial Doppler option required to sup-

port this transducer.
538 0001 Transducer EEPROM checksum invalid. Also

try [DC: B14] and [DB:B15].
53A This system supports only TEE transducers and

IJV locator transducer (21211B).
53B Software or Hardware error (Transducer

inconsistent with reformat.)
53C Software or Hardware error (Table in software

is not correct.)
53D Omni TEE transducer calibration failed.

Straighten transducer, and lift and lower lock-
ing bail. Contact your HP service
representative.
5R-16
Run Time Errors
53D Omni TEE transducer calibration failed.

Straighten transducer.Also check bail and
connector.
53E This transducer not supported. Transducer has

been obsoleted.
551 Software or Hardware error (Unexpected

frame interrupt.)
552 Software or Hardware error (Frame error.)
553 Software or Hardware error (No interrupt, but

RS-232 invoked.)
554 Software or Hardware error (RS-232 break too

long or short.)
555 Software or Hardware error (No nodes avail-

able in RS-232 fifo.)
556 Software or Hardware error RS-232 error.
559 Software or Hardware error RS-232 never

came up.
55A Invalid power supply tap voltages. Check two

plug-in fuses (green) on [XPS:A8] Also try [FEs,
ID:A13, TGC:B13].
55B Software or Hardware error (Error allocating

RAM.)
560 Software or Hardware error (Bad functional

test number passed.)
561 The LED switch on the DC card is in the

wrong position. Contact your HP service
representative.
564 This transducer not supported. This transducer

is unsupported by this hardware configuration
or option configuration.
5R-17
Run Time Errors
566 Software or Hardware error Bad data read

from PV card Check PV power supply [PV:A9].
580
5E0 Fine Delays are missing.
5E1 Invalid test signal from DC. Try [DC:B14].
5E2 Bad test RF signal. Try [DB:B15, ID:A13,

TGC:B13].
5E5 CDs are not properly recognized. Check CDs.
5E6 Too many flat tap CDs installed.
5E7 Color flow failure. Try [DD:A12].
5E8 Image detector calibration has failed. Exit

resolve mode and run resident test.
5F0 Software or Hardware error (Time out waiting

for run loop.)
5F3 Software or Hardware error (Unable to create

a global exchange.)

a global semaphore.)

a global process.)
5F6 Software or Hardware error (SHARK startup

error.)
5F7 Software or Hardware error (Info size check

error.)
5F8 2.5V reference voltage out of specification. Try

[XPS:A8].
5F9 Vascular option requires image detector.

0A13 [ID:A13].
600 Software or Hardware error (Generic shcore

error.)
5R-18
Run Time Errors
601 Check for software mismatch or communica-

tions problem between subsystems. (Subgroup
lost.)
602 Software or Hardware error (Severity of event

exceeds max.)
603 Software or Hardware error (Cant send sub-

group with no events.)

tions problem between subsystems. (Max.
number of subgroups exceeded.)
605 Software or Hardware error (Synchronize

Imager undefined event.)

tions problem between subsystems.(Unrecog-
nized message type in Interpret stimulus.)
607 Software or Hardware error (Variable size

agent not expected.)
608 Software or Hardware error (Long agent not

expected.)
609 Software or Hardware error (Short agent not

expected.)
60A Software or Hardware error (Variable size

agent expected.)
60B Check for software mismatch or communica-

tions problem between subsystems. (Imager
stimulus must be A-Z only.)
60C Software or Hardware error (Garbled imager

stimulus message.)
60D Software or Hardware error (Invalid imager

stimulus message.)
60E Software or Hardware error (Uninitialized

interpret stimulus agent.)
60F Software or Hardware error (Max. number of

imager stimuli exceeded.)
5R-19
Run Time Errors
610 Software or Hardware error (Max. number of

internal agents exceeded.)
611 Software or Hardware error (Agent size dis-

agrees with table.)
612 Software or Hardware error (Agent max. size

254 bytes.)
613 Software or Hardware error (Attribute table

entry missing.)
614 Software or Hardware error (Number of

entries in attribute table wrong.)
615 Software or Hardware error (Too many inter-

pret stimulus internal agents.)
616 Software or Hardware error (Bad ID passed to

interpret stimulus.)
617 Software or Hardware error (Uninitialized

array agent.)
618 Software or Hardware error (Given array agent

element size is too large.)
619 Software or Hardware error (Given array agent

index too large.)
61A Software or Hardware error (Enumeration of

inhibit lists bad.)
61B Software or Hardware error (Too many

inhibits.)
61C Check for software mismatch or communica-

tions problem between subsystems. (Key ID is
out of range in dymap.)
61D Check for software mismatch or communica-

tions problem between subsystems. (Key type
is undefined in dymap.)
61E Software or Hardware error (Inhibit list array

mismatch.)
5R-20
Run Time Errors
61F Software or Hardware error (Vk attributes

mismatch.)
620 Software or Hardware error (Dynamic map-

ping table received upstroke before down-
stroke.)
621 Software or Hardware error (Max. vk functions

exceeded.)
622 Software or Hardware error (Layouts mis-

match.)
623 Software or Hardware error (Bad dymap

inhibit list ID.)
624 Unable to respond to controls pressed. If prob-

lem persists, contact your HP service repre-
sentative.

tions problem between subsystems. (Imager
stimulus not declared in Interpret stimulus.)
626 Software or Hardware error (Internal table is

too small.)
627 Software or Hardware error (Feedback mes-

sage bigger than limit.)
627 Software or Hardware error (Feedback mes-

sage bigger than limit.)
628 Software or Hardware error (Key feedback out

of room in the auto-on list.)
628 KEY FDBK OUT OF ROOM IN AUTO_ON_LIST.
62B Software or Hardware error (Empty event

group.)
62C Software or Hardware error (TU linked list size

needs to be increased.)
62D Software or Hardware error (Too many key

messages.)
62F Processor graphics waiting for signal from

Keyprocessor.
5R-21
Run Time Errors
630 Software or Hardware error (Text_id passed

into key feedback object is out of range.)
707 Software or Hardware error (Bad number of

ROM presets.)
708 Inconsistency in CMOS memory. Erase and

Restore memory.
709 Software or Hardware error (ROM preset ID.)
70A Software or Hardware error (Wrong preset

size.)
70B Software or Hardware error (Preset rede-

fined.)
70C Imaging is frozen. Unfreeze image and try

again.
70D Software or Hardware error (Preset type

mismatch.)
70E Loop memory full. Delete unwanted loop(s) and

try again.
70F Software or Hardware error (Unspecified

parameter in vk function.)
710 Software or Hardware error (Bad transducer

connector idx.)

number of depths.)

number of frequencies.)

number of foci.)

number line to line times.)
715 Unrecognized transducer type.
716 Software or Hardware error (Cant start fzacq

when entering playthrough.)
5R-22
Run Time Errors
717 Software or Hardware error (Request agent

isnt part of preset.)
718 Software or Hardware error (Wrong preset

query routine.)
719 Software or Hardware error (Wrong preset

query routine.)
71A Software or Hardware error (Bad Doppler line

angle.)
71B Software or Hardware error (Last transducer

cutoff depth.)
71C Software or Hardware error (Null address in

txtutil stack.)
71D Software or Hardware error (Txtutil stack is

full.)
71E CMOS initialized because bad checksum.
71F Loop memory full. Delete unwanted loop(s) and

try again.
720 Printer not installed or not selected in Setup.
721 Software or Hardware error (Stimulus to DSR

state machine unexpected.)
722 Multiple loop selected. Select one loop and try

again.
723 Multiple loops required.
724 Touch Loop Display to exit.
726 Must complete AQ ROI edit before changing

imaging controls.
727 Software or Hardware error (Colmap not found

in list.)
728 Cannot perform this action while Trace mode is

active.
729 Cannot acquire while dual image is active.
72A Cannot acquire while Trigger mode is active.
5R-23
Run Time Errors
72B Image must be frozen. Press Freeze.
72C Cannot perform this action while VCR play is

active.
72D Cannot perform this action while in Analysis

Full Screen report.
72E There is no tape in the VCR.
72F This tape is write-protected.
730 Cannot record until the VCR tape is stopped.
731 The printer is busy, turned off, or out of paper.

Please check printer status.
732 The VCR is not responding. Make sure the VCR

is turned on.
733 Cannot perform this action while CW mode is

active.
734 Software or Hardware error (Lateral Averaging

Array incorrect - bad end condition or too
many elements.)
735 Software or Hardware error (Lateral Averaging

Array incorrect - may not start with depth 0.)
736 Software or Hardware error (Wrong number of

elements in the BID_TYPE enum or wrong
order in write_rtn[].)
737 Software or Hardware error (Bad state/event

in cmosbu_state().)
738 0001 To limit acoustic exposure to the eye, use a

TCD-TO preset.
739 Select another preset. Preset not valid for non-

imaging transducer.
810 RST Class Error.
811 RT Load is not installed.
5R-24
Run Time Errors
812 Insufficient board configuration for running

resident self tests. Check hardwareID screen.
814 Front End has detected missing or defective

boards required for imaging; entering resident
self test. Check hardware ID screen.
815 Back End has detected missing or defective

boards required for imaging; entering resident
self test. Check hardware ID screen.
816 Front End is not responding, entering resident

self test.
A00 Software or Hardware error (invalid type of

data to display.)
A01 Software or Hardware error (float conv. width

too wide/narrow.)
A02 Software or Hardware error (invalid type of

data to conv.)
A03 Software or Hardware error (invalid demo-

graphic data encoding)
A04 Software or Hardware error (invalid system

data encoding)
A05 Software or Hardware error (too many report

items. Increase size of RAM tables)
A06 Software or Hardware error (field width is not

allowed)
A10 Software or Hardware error (Cant edit Fixed/

System field)
A11 Software or Hardware error (Cant find row #

for field)
A12 Software or Hardware error (Unexpected data

type)
A13 Software or Hardware error (No editable field

exists)
A14 Software or Hardware error (Data type storage

unallowed)
5R-25
Run Time Errors

type)

type)

type)
A18 Software or Hardware error (Bad Edit Report

resource)
A19 Software or Hardware error (Bad Edit Report

event)
A1A Software or Hardware error (Unable to find an

editable fld.)
A1B Software or Hardware error (invalid dep. data

for blanking)
A30 Software or Hardware error (No reports are

configured, cant build report menu)
A31 Software or Hardware error(No groups are

configured, cant build report menu)
A32 Software or Hardware error (No group id is

present when one is required)
A33 Software or Hardware error (An invalid pack-

age pointer was used)
A34 Software or Hardware error (AnalMakeCfg-

Itemstring received a type other than package,
group, meas, or calc.)
A35 Software or Hardware error (The

AnalKeyEvents() routine received a resource it
didnt request)
A36 Software or Hardware error (number of calc

menus exceeds the limit
ANAL_MAX_CALC_MENUS)
A37 Software or Hardware error

(ANAL_MAX_STUDY_PACKAGES has
exceeded max # of packages) -
5R-26
Run Time Errors
A40 Software or Hardware error (Invalid menu type

found)
A41 Software or Hardware error (Invalid anal state

change attempted)
A42 Software or Hardware error (cant choose

meas and non-meas from menu at same time)
A43 Software or Hardware error (attempt was

made to get calc input which was not a meas,
demo, or system data)
A44 Software or Hardware error (An expected

calc_ptr was not a calc_ptr)
A45 Software or Hardware error (System data input

is not ready for a calculation)
A46 Software or Hardware error (menu entry not

found for given meas. or calc. data pointer)
A47 Software or Hardware error (must be in Anal

Editing Report state to process Approve key
input)
A48 Software or Hardware error (must be in Anal

Editing Report state to process Menu key
input)
A49 Software or Hardware error (expected menu

or approve key return but got preempt, reacti-
vate or another key instead)
A4A Software or Hardware error (too many calc

dependencies to fit in calcs_tocompute array
in module AnalBldCalcComputeList)
A4B Software or Hardware error (too many mea-

surements are being requested of
AnalMeasProcess)
A4C Software or Hardware error (no measure-

ments are being requested of AnalMeasPro-
cess)
A4D Software or Hardware error (Meas package

returned an invalid measurement to analysis)
5R-27
Run Time Errors
A51 Software or Hardware error (AnalProcToggle-

Item received a type other than package,
group, meas, or calc.)
A52 Software or Hardware error (AnalSetForced-

Bits expects all items to be calc_ptrs or
meas_ptrs in list)
A53 Software or Hardware error (Auto meas

entries meta-meas entries require a meas char
id. (get_meas.c))
A54 Software or Hardware error (Only

MEASUREMENT_DATA &
DEMOGRAPHIC_DATA are exceptable to Anal-
StoreMeasData (anal_meas.c))
A55 Software or Hardware error (Can not enter

measurements during config, code shouldnt
get to here... (enter_meas.c))
A56 Software or Hardware error (The number of

elements that came in to the routine does not
equal the number at the end of the routine)
A60 Software or Hardware error (_HEADER_ ptr is

nil)
A61 Software or Hardware error (unexpected

header data type)
A62 Software or Hardware error (match(): syntax

error)
A63 Software or Hardware error (group(): syntax

error)
A64 Software or Hardware error (parser(): bad

token found)
A65 Software or Hardware error (parser(): Too

many ()
A66 Software or Hardware error (Unexpected

header data type)
5R-28
Run Time Errors
A67 Software or Hardware error (undefined table

#)
A68 Software or Hardware error (table not large

enough)
A69 Software or Hardware error (NUMBER stack

overflow)
A6A Software or Hardware error (NUMBER stack

underflow)
A6B Software or Hardware error (xeq_math: unex-

pected token)
A6C Software or Hardware error (unconsumed

NUMBER left on stack)
A6D Software or Hardware error (Analysis: Too

many definitions for averages)
A70 Software or Hardware error (Analysis: Perform

calcs is active, cant update events)
A71 Software or Hardware error (Analysis: Data

entry is active, cant update events)
A72 Software or Hardware error (Analysis: Unbal-

anced update event region)
A73 Software or Hardware error (Analysis: Data

entry is active, cant enter perform calcs.)
A74 Software or Hardware error (Analysis: Update

events is active, cant enter perform calcs.)

anced perform calc region)
A76 Software or Hardware error Analysis: Perform

calcs is active, cant enter data)
A77 Software or Hardware error (Analysis: Update

events is active, cant enter data)

anced data entry region)
5R-29
Run Time Errors
A80 Software or Hardware error (idw window num-

ber too big)
A81 Software or Hardware error too many lines in

IDW)
A82 Software or Hardware error (A call to sprintf

generated a string that was too long for the
space allocated to it)
A83 Software or Hardware error (AnalGet_

received resource it never requested)
A84 Software or Hardware error (A measurement

which was in the meas primitive list is no
longer there)
A85 Software or Hardware error (Input is not

usable from the AnalGet_ object)
A86 Software or Hardware error (Input to Anal-

PrimitiveReturned is invalid)
A87 Software or Hardware error (Input to Anal-

DoneMeasGetInput is invalid)
A88 Software or Hardware error (There isnt any

routine to call once AnalGet_ has an APR-
ROVED string)
A89 Software or Hardware error AnalGet can only

handle one request at a time)
AA0 Software or Hardware error (All Sail CMOS ini-

tialization routines should call back... see sail-
cmos.c)
AA1 Software or Hardware error (The ptr for read-

ing or writing was out of Sail CMOS range)
AA3 Software or Hardware error (A Sail CMOS ini-

tialization routine was called from outside sail-
cmos.c)
AA4 Software or Hardware error (Bad CMOS

checksum)
5R-30
Run Time Errors
AA5 Analysis memory full. Please erase unneces-

sary data from analysis report and continue.
AA6 Software or Hardware error (Analysis: BBM

data is larger than destination array
AB0 Software or Hardware error (a function has

been attempted on a class, where it is not
allowed)
AB1 Software or Hardware error (Invalid Object

number)
AB2 Software or Hardware error (Invalid compo-

nent ID number)
AB3 Software or Hardware error (Components

data structure not defined)
AB7 Software or Hardware error Analysis: List of

inputs is too big)
AB8 Software or Hardware error (Analysis: Size

mismatch of inputs list)
AB9 Software or Hardware error Analysis: Depen-

dencies list is too big)
ABA Software or Hardware error Analysis: Callers

dependency list is too small)
ABB Software or Hardware error (Analysis: Too

many dependencies)
AD0 Software or Hardware error (Wrong meas

primitive made)
AD0 Make an acceleration/ deceleration measure-

0000 ment.
AD0 Make an area measurement.

0001
AD0 Make a circumference measurement.

0002
AD0 Make a Doppler frequency/ velocity measure-

0003 ment.
5R-31
Run Time Errors
AD0 Measure an M-mode height.

0004
AD0 Trace the Doppler spectrum.

0005
AD0 Measure a 2-D length.

0006
AD0 Measure a 2-D length or M-mode height.

0007
AD0 Make a mean velocity trace.

0008
AD0 Make a pressure gradient trace.

0009
AD0 Measure the time from onset to cessation of

000A flow velocity.
AD0 Measure the time from onset to peak velocity.

000B
AD0 Measure the time from peak to cessation of

000C flow velocity.
AD0 Measure an M-mode slope.

000D
AD0 Measure a time interval.

000E
AD0 Measure a Doppler velocity.

000F
AD0 Measure a 2-D volume.

0010
B01 Software or Hardware error (Null update loc.

not allowed.)
B02 Software or Hardware error (Malloc failed.)
B03 Software or Hardware error (User data

required for this resource.)
5R-32
Run Time Errors
B04 Software or Hardware error (No menu key

user.)
B05 Software or Hardware error (No approve key

user.)
B06 Software or Hardware error (No text key user.)
B07 Software or Hardware error (No trackball

user.)
B08 Software or Hardware error (Zero scale factor

not allowed.)
B09 Software or Hardware error (Al least one

resource required.)
B0A Software or Hardware error (Cant open mes-

sage exchange.)
B0B Software or Hardware error (PSOS send_x

failed.)
B0C Software or Hardware error (PSOS req_x

failed.)
B0D Software or Hardware error (Bad RM opera-

tion.)
B0E Software or Hardware error (Invalid resource.)
B0F Software or Hardware error (No erase key

user.)
B10 Software or Hardware error (No point key

user.)
B11 Software or Hardware error (No trace key

user.)
B12 Software or Hardware error (No undo key

user.)
B13 Software or Hardware error (Bad trackball

update type.)
B14 Software or Hardware error (RM application

already active.)
5R-33
Run Time Errors
B15 Software or Hardware error (No clear key

user.)
B16 Software or Hardware error (Too many RM

events generated.)
B20 Software or Hardware error (Soft reformat

table mismatch.)
B21 Software or Hardware error (Bad soft reformat

type.)
B22 Software or Hardware error (Multiple soft

reformats requested.)
B23 Software or Hardware error (Severity does not

indicate soft reformat.)
B24 Software or Hardware error (Missing soft

reformat designation.)
B25 Software or Hardware error (Bad event list.)
B26 Software or Hardware error (Unbalanced com

table.)
B27 Software or Hardware error (Map between

events and COMs is corrupt.)
B28 Software or Hardware error (Mismatch in com

table.)
B29 Software or Hardware error (No event data.)
B2A Software or Hardware error (Invalid level ID.)
B2B Software or Hardware error (Event size

changed.)
B2C Software or Hardware error (Insufficient buffer

space.)
B2D Software or Hardware error (Bad stimulus

send.)
B30 Software or Hardware error (Invalid window

type.)
5R-34
Run Time Errors
B31 Software or Hardware error (Negative priority.)
B32 Software or Hardware error (Malloc failed.)
B33 Software or Hardware error (Window not

found.)
B34 Software or Hardware error (Invalid update

operation.)
B35 Software or Hardware error (Unexpected WM

event type.)
B36 Software or Hardware error (IDW too big.)
B37 Software or Hardware error (Raster string size

does not match.)
B80 Software or Hardware error (Indicated win-

dow not created.)
B81 Software or Hardware error (Bad status from

get-overlap-case.)
B82 Software or Hardware error (Rectangle list too

small to add to.)
B83 Software or Hardware error (No graphics

allowed in unmapped or uncreated.)
B84 Software or Hardware error (Size of list of wids

too small to add to.)
B85 Software or Hardware error (Cant remove wid

from empty list.)
B86 Software or Hardware error (Cant find wid in

list.)
B87 Software or Hardware error (Resize rect must

overlap itself.)
B88 Software or Hardware error (Event location

cant be NULL.)
B89 Software or Hardware error (Need attribute

structure from Wm_CreateWindow.)
5R-35
Run Time Errors
B8A Software or Hardware error (GetIntersect rect

must return intersection.)
B8B Software or Hardware error (Cant create win-

dow, max. number reached.)
B8C Software or Hardware error (Resize cant gen-

erate more than 2 rects.)
B8D Software or Hardware error (Window must be

unmapped for this operation.)
B90 Insufficient number of items selected.
B91 Software or Hardware error (String given for

text input box too many chars or lines)
B92 Too many items selected.
B93 Software or Hardware error (An attribute is

being changed which cannot be changed
while the dialog is displayed)
B94 Software or Hardware error (This dialog has a

parent dialog which is not displayed)
B95 Software or Hardware error (An attempt was

made to shutdown a widget that is not a WIN-
DOW)
B96 Software or Hardware error (String given for

text input box too many chars or lines.)
B97 Software or Hardware error (An application

must give the display procedure the ID of a
WINDOW widget)
B98 Software or Hardware error (An attempt was

made to shutdown a window that wasnt dis-
played)
B99 Software or Hardware error (The resize

attribute is not set and the widget size is not
large enough)
B9A Software or Hardware error (The parent of an

option button must be of GROUP class)
5R-36
Run Time Errors
B9B Software or Hardware error (An EXPOSE event

came in for a non displayed window)
B9C Invalid control was pressed.
BB1 Software or Hardware error (Null update loc.

not allowed.)
BB2 Software or Hardware error (Malloc failed.)
BB3 Software or Hardware error (User data

required for this resource.)
BB4 Software or Hardware error (No menu key

user.)
BB5 Software or Hardware error (No approve key

user.)
BB6 Software or Hardware error (No text keys

user.)
BB7 Software or Hardware error (Bad user ID.)
BB8 Software or Hardware error (Instance struc-

ture not valid.)
BB9 Software or Hardware error (At least one

resource required.)
BBA Software or Hardware error (Cant open mes-

sage exchange.)
BBB Software or Hardware error (PSOS send_x

failed.)
BBC Software or Hardware error (PSOS req_x

failed.)
BBD Software or Hardware error (Bad RR opera-

tion.)
BBE Software or Hardware error (Invalid resource.)
BBF Software or Hardware error (No resource

passed in.)
BC0 Software or Hardware error (Too many

resources passed in.)
5R-37
Run Time Errors
BC1 Software or Hardware error (No user of

resource.)
BC2 Software or Hardware error (No undo key

user.)
BC3 Software or Hardware error (Bad trackball

update type.)
BC4 Software or Hardware error (RR application

already active.)
BC5 Software or Hardware error (No clear key

user.)
BC6 Software or Hardware error (Too many RR

events generated.)
BD0 Software or Hardware error No more fields

available for Calib_get_entry call. Must either
raise CAL_MAX_FIELDS or free other text field
before making this call.
BD1 Software or Hardware error The textfield

pointer given to Text_free_entry is not a valid
member of the calib_fields structure.
BE0 Software or Hardware error (Float conv. width

too wide/narrow.)
BE1 Software or Hardware error (Delete or map on

uncreated dialog.)
BE2 Software or Hardware error (Delete on dis-

played dialog.)
BE3 Software or Hardware error (Shutdown on

undisplayed dialog.)
D00 Software or Hardware error (Global.)
D01 Software or Hardware error (Creating global

exchange.)

semaphore.)
5R-38
Run Time Errors

process.)
D04 Software or Hardware error (Routine queue.)
D05 Software or Hardware error (Routine queue

parameter.)
D06 Software or Hardware error (Routine queue

parameter.)
D07 Software or Hardware error (Option informa-

tion.)
D08 Software or Hardware error (Linked list

default.)
D09 Software or Hardware error (Replace opera-

tion overwrote data.)
D0A Processor sent unexpected interrupt.
D0B Software or Hardware error (pSOS error.)
D0C Software or Hardware error (Bad case in

switch statement.)
D0D Software or Hardware error (Unexpected

value.)
D0E Software or Hardware error (IPC call failed.)
D0F Software or Hardware error (IPC call failed.)
D10 Software or Hardware error (IPC call failed.)
D13 Software or Hardware error (Ident_p call

failed.)
D14 Software or Hardware error (IPC call returned

an error.)
D15 Software or Hardware error (IPC call returned

an error.)
5R-39
Run Time Errors
D16 Unsupported hardware in slot indicated by

0XXX extra data bits.
D17 Illegal hardware in slot indicated by extra data

0XXX bits.
D18 Unknown hardware in slot indicated by extra

0XXX data bits.
D19 Software or Hardware error (Alloc_seg call

failed.)
D1A Software or Hardware error (Assign_seg call

failed.)
D1B Failure erasing Flash memory. Check flash

card, [PG:C1]
D1C Flash programming voltage (+12V) too low.
D1D Failure programming Flash memory. Check

flash card, [PG:C1]
D1F Invalid Backup data. Make valid backup before

attempting to Restore.
E00 Software or Hardware error Cant send error tp

exchange.
E01 Software or Hardware error Cant get error

message.
E02 Software or Hardware error Cant find error

exchange.
E03 Software or Hardware error Cant create error

exchange.
E04 Software or Hardware error Cant add to error

log.
E05 Software or Hardware error Cant return error

message.
E06 Software or Hardware error Cant return error

message.
5R-40
Run Time Errors
E07 Software or Hardware error Non-zero length,

null ptr.
E08 Software or Hardware error Cannot identify

sem.
E10 RS-232 communications failure.
E20 Software or Hardware error (IPC buffer size

mismatch.)
E21 Software or Hardware error (IPC out of buff-

ers.)
E22 Software or Hardware error (IPC fhdr size mis-

match.)
E23 Software or Hardware error (IPC out of fhdrs.)
E24 Software or Hardware error (IPC unknown

function type.)
E25 Software or Hardware error (IPC unknown

message type.)
E26 Software or Hardware error (IPC create error.)
E27 Software or Hardware error (IPC remote cre-

ate error.)
E28 Software or Hardware error (IPC power-on

synch error.)
E29 Software or Hardware error (IPC could not

send packet.)
E2A Software or Hardware error (IPC could not

start system.)
E2B Software or Hardware error (IPC could not find

the object.)
E2C Software or Hardware error (IPC could not sig-

nal process.)
E2D Software or Hardware error (IPC buffer error.)
5R-41
Run Time Errors
E2E Software or Hardware error (IPC op performed

on an invalid ID.)
E2F Software or Hardware error (IPC unknown

message type returned.)
E30 NO KEY PANEL. Check key processor [KP:K1]
E31 Software or Hardware error (IPC no response

from DSS node.)
E32 Software or Hardware error Communication

with the Front End has failed. Turn on the LED
switch on the DC card. (IPC no response from
scan node.)
E33 Software or Hardware error (IPC buffer pool

error.)
E34 Software or Hardware error (IPC error reas-

sembling message.)
E35 Software or Hardware error (IPC error getting

static buffers.)
E40 Software or Hardware error (Event stream gar-

bled.)
E41 Software or Hardware error (Can only specify

one subsystem.)
E42 Software or Hardware error (PID not found in

reply data table.)
E43 Software or Hardware error (Multiply specified

reply data.)
E44 Software or Hardware error (Reply data is

missing.)
E45 Software or Hardware error (Insufficient reply

space.)
E46 Software or Hardware error (Invalid event ID;

must be A-Z only.)
5R-42
Run Time Errors
E47 Software or Hardware error (Max. allowed

event size exceeded.)
E48 Software or Hardware error (Unexpected mne-

monic.)
E49 Check for a mismatch of software revisions in

the subsystems.
E4A Software or Hardware error (Max. number of

events exceeded.)
E50 Generic VCR error. Check VCR
E51 Software or Hardware error (Invalid VCR

request.)
E53 Software or Hardware error (Invalid VCR aux

command.)
E54 Software or Hardware error (VCR Q overflow.)
E55 Software or Hardware error (Bad level 2 state.)
E56 Software or Hardware error (Disqualified VCR

software state.)
E57 Software or Hardware error (Bad VCR transi-

tion level.)
E58 Software or Hardware error (VCR system Q

overflow.)
E60 Software or Hardware error (VCR free text

widget not found.)
E61 Software or Hardware error (VCR OK, widget

not found.)
E62 Software or Hardware error (VCR cancel wid-

get not found.)
E63 Software or Hardware error (VCR input widget

not found.)
E64 Software or Hardware error (VCR dialog box ID

not found.)
5R-43
Run Time Errors
E70 Software or Hardware error (Cant create

VCRX.)
E71 Software or Hardware error (Cant get VCR

message.)
E72 Software or Hardware error (Cant return VCR

message.)
E73 Software or Hardware error (Cant send VCR

message.)
E74 Software or Hardware error (Cant get VCR IPC

message.)
E75 Software or Hardware error (Cant attach

VCRX.)
E76 Software or Hardware error (Cant identify

VCR.)
EC0 Software or Hardware error (Bad node ID pro-

viding options.)
EC1 Software or Hardware error (Unexpected size

of option data.)
EC2 [KP:K1]. Timed out waiting for Key Processor.
EC3 Timed out waiting for Scanner.
EC4 Missing Autocool option. [XPS:A8].

0001
EC4 [PVPS:A9] in 64 channel system.

0002
EC4 Neither Cardiac nor Linear options installed.

0003 Check options.
EC5 PAL/NTSC switches on [TGC:B13] and [PG:C1]

do not match.
EC6 Doppler hardware mismatch. [DP:C13] present,

but no [DD:A12].
5R-44
Run Time Errors
EC7 DSR hardware installed without CLR hardware.

DSR disabled. Check CLR boards. [C CLR:C3]
[B&W CLR:C3]
EC8 Pediatrics option installed without cardiac

application.
EC9 Color Flow hardware mismatch.

[FP:C11]present, but no [DD:A12].
ECA Single CVI Card in wrong slot. Single CVI must

be in [CVM:C10].
F00 Software or Hardware error (Exception error.)
F08 0000 Processor bus error.
F0C 0000 Processor address error.
F10 Processor illegal instruction.
F14 Processor zero divide exception
F18 Processor CHK instruction error.
F1C Processor TRAPV instruction error.
F20 Processor privilege violation.
F24 Software or Hardware error (Trace error.)
F28 Software or Hardware error (EM1010 error.)
F2C Software or Hardware error (EM1111 error.)
F60 Software or Hardware error (Spur error.)
F64 Software or Hardware error (Level 1 error.)
F6C Software or Hardware error (Level 3 error.)
5R-45
Run Time Errors
F7C Software or Hardware error (Level 7 error.)
FF0 Software or Hardware error (Math error.)
5R-46
6 Preventive Maintenance
Introduction
Most of the recommendations described in this Chapter are basic and
designed to minimize the possibility of unexpected system failure. For the
most part, preventive maintenance (PM) procedures call for thorough system
cleaning. This is particularly true of the OEM peripheral equipment; because
the peripherals contain electro-mechanical components which, if exposed to
constant or excessive environmental dust and humidity, may degrade in
performance and reliability.
System Preventive Maintenance

Basic PM procedures for the main system consist primarily of the very
important task of periodically and consistently cleaning the four air filters;
two at the front of the E-Box and two more beneath the front of the cart.
Maintaining an accurate record of electrical safety checks as well as visual
checks for liquid spills and other signs of potential problems will also help
prevent down time.
Peripherals Preventive Maintenance

Basic PM procedures for system compatible OEM peripherals are offered in
this manual mostly as a reminder. More complete procedures for each
peripheral are available in the individual OEM peripheral service manuals.
Safety & Performance Assurance Tests

Safety checks and Performance Assurance tests are described in detail. The
last section on this Chapter provides a guideline on how often the
recommended procedures should be performed.
For convenience, all recommended tests are tabulated in the

NOTE
following two pages.
6-1
Preventive Maintenance
Performance Assurance
Performance Assurance Checklist
System: ( ) Check error log content and execute RST tests.
( ) Check mechanical components (wheels lock etc.)
( ) Inspect system cables for cracks / cuts / wear.
Xducers: ( ) Inspect for bent pins / cracks / swelling / latches.
( ) Perform DOT Test on all Probes.
( ) Perform image evaluation.
TEE: ( ) Visually and mechanically inspect probe.
( ) Perform electrical tests.
( ) Perform image quality tests.
( ) Check for proper TEE care and storage.
Control: ( ) Perform keyboard test / Inspect panel lettering / Inspect
and clean keyboard membranes.
( ) Check CRT performance and clean CRT face.
( ) Inspect control cables for cracks / cuts / wear.
E-Box: ( ) Clean air filters / Inspect for internal dust.
( ) Check condition of connectors and latches.
( ) Check operation of fans.
6-2
Power Supply: ( ) Check dc voltage levels.

( ) Check filters / fan noise.
( ) Check integrity of trunk cables.
VCR: ( ) Clean video heads / verify lamps.
( ) Verify quality of Play / Record.
Hardcopy: ( ) Clean print head / rollers / internal dust.
( ) Check print quality and save for future comparison.
Physio: ( ) Check operation of position / gain / ECG cable.
( ) Check operation of HS / RESP / PULSE.
( ) Inspect accessory cables for cracks / cuts / wear.
System
Cart: ( ) Inspect power switch / power cords.
( ) Inspect casters.
( ) Clean all exterior surfaces.
Safety: ( ) Perform TEE safety test / visual inspection.
( ) Perform system electrical safety tests.
( ) Inspect system cables for cracks / cuts / wear.
Test
Results: ( ) GROUND ______ LEAKAGE_________
( ) LEAD __________ TEE ______________
6-3
System Maintenance
Final Test: ( ) Checked complete system operation.

( ) Executed final basic test / Clear error log.
( ) Check / Update database information.
System Maintenance
The Keyboard Panels and other surfaces are likely to be affected by
accidental liquid spills and other materials including excessive amounts of
gel. Although a protective membrane beneath the keyboard keys does offer
an extra level of protection against these accidental occurrences, spilled
materials may seep into electrical components beneath the panel and cause
intermittent failures. During PM's look for such potential problems, as well
as loose knobs and worn TGC/LGC controls.
Note that it is possible to remove the keyboard plastic panel so that it may be
thoroughly cleaned under a faucet. Thoroughly dry before reinstalling!
The exposed membrane may also be cleaned at this time using a lint free
cloth and soapy water.
Here is a list of good practice points to keep in mind:
1 Turn system OFF when not in use.
2 Do not remove or install boards or cables with system power ON.
3 While the system is powered On and not in use, keep Gain control
in minimal position.
All service and maintenance procedures MUST be preceded by

NOTE
adequate Electrical Static Discharge (ESD) safeguards.
Follow ESD guidelines to avoid the possibility of inadvertent deterioration or
destruction of sensitive electronic components.
General guidelines include:
6-4
System Maintenance
❏ Avoid working in carpeted areas.

❏ Use wrist grounding strap properly grounded
❏ Use a grounding mat for assembly work on sensitive areas
6-5
System Maintenance
If a vacuum cleaner is used to clean the interior of the Keyprocessor

NOTE Electronics or any other ESD sensitive part of the system, take the
necessary Static Discharge precautions to avoid damage to the
electronics.
Power Supply
All power for the cart's electronics is provided by the power supply box
located inside the base of the cart. An important required maintenance is to
insure good air flow to the power supply by:
1 Occasionally wipe the air vent holes under the cart base with a soft clean
cloth to assure adequate ventilation
2 Keep the system fans and filters clean; the two power supply air filters
may be pulled out of the system from the front of the cart, at the cart
base. Clean or replace the filters as needed.
3 Also, as an added preventive measure, examine power supply connectors
and cables for tight bends and insulation damage.
It is most important to assure that terminal strip screws for all

NOTE
power connections (these are the power cord terminal and isolation
transformer strips) are tight. Factory specification for these critical
screws is a torque setting of 10 inch/Lbs. To insure that this setting
is correct, a torque screwdriver is required.
6-6
Transducer Maintenance
All transducers are exposed to many potential damaging situations during
use and cleaning. Check them for signs of damage:
❏ Cracks on the handle
❏ Cracks on the nose piece
❏ Cuts or gouges on the lens material
❏ Swelling of the lens material
❏ Cracks or other signs of damage to the connector
❏ Bent or damaged pins
❏ Integrity and flexibility of the cable
Transducers with cracks in the handle should be replaced. Although

NOTE
no lethal voltages are present during normal use, it is possible for a
tingle to be felt by the operator that could result in a nervous
reaction and potential injury. Cracks will also interfere with
standard cleaning procedures.
Transducer performance may also be checked by following

procedures outlined in Performance Assurance checks described
later in this chapter.
It should be noted that multielement transducers may have up to

three elements inoperative without suffering image degradation.
The location of the inoperative element is important.
6-7
Transesophageal Transducers
Cleaning
Transducers should be cleaned after each use with approved disinfectants.

These products are screened for compatibility and are constantly changing
and improved by the manufacturers.
See the most current approved list in the TEE Transducer Care Booklet (P/N:
21364-99740). In addition to this booklet, there is a TEE Care Video Tape
available (P/N: 21364-99790 for NTSC, and P/N: 21364-99780 for PAL
version).
Use the following recommended disinfection procedure after each use:

1 Wipe the distal tip and shaft, up to the control housing, with gauze pads
that have been soaked in mild, soapy water.
2 Thoroughly rinse the distal tip and the flexible shaft in tap water. Be very
careful not to get water in the connector or control housing.
3 Place the distal tip and flexible shaft in the disinfecting solution for the
period specified by the solution manufacturer.
4 After removing from the disinfectant, thoroughly rinse the distal tip and
shaft in tap water. Wipe dry with gauze pads.
5 Lightly wipe the steering mechanism with a pad moistened with 70% iso-
propyl alcohol.
6 Suspend the transducer on a wall mounted rack, and let it air dry.
6-8
Per ipheral Maintenance
Peripheral Maintenance
The procedures indicated will generally require the removal of the unit from
the cart. Therefore, it should be performed by trained service personnel.
VCR
Periodically, the VCR requires the following maintenance:
a. Manual Video Head cleaning.
This requires the removal of the VCR from the cart, the
removal of the top cover, and the thorough cleaning of the
individual video heads using an appropriate solvent and a lint
free cloth or Chamois.
b. Cleaning of video tape path
Using the same solvent, cover the entire path and make sure
to clean the audio and control heads. If lubrication is needed,
use only a very light oil being specially careful not to
contaminate the tape path.
Video Printers
Optional devices like the SONY or KOWA video printers
require the periodic partial disassembly of print heads to
effectively remove paper debris and abrasive material.
Maintenance will be minimized by the consistent use of high
quality paper coated with an antistatic protecting chemical.
Dirty sensor surfaces are often the cause of malfunction. Keep
sensors clean! For guidance, refer to the appropriate printer
service manual.
6-9
Recommended Frequency of Maintenance Procedures
Recommended Frequency of Maintenance Procedures
The frequency of preventive maintenance performed on the system plays a
key role on extending or eliminating downtime due to poor performance or
unexpected breakdown. The table below offers recommendations that must
be weighed by factors like frequency of usage and environmental
conditions. In every case, a frequent check of the safety related items is
highly recommended.
Table 6-1 Maintenance Tasks
Tes t/Clean Frequency Interval
Air Filters - All Three Months or sooner - Clean/replace

Transducers Six Months - Check for cracks, bent pins
TEE Probes Before each use - Steering, Visual test
Safety Six Months - Ground Impedance/Leakage test
VCR Six Months - Clean Video Heads/ Tape path
Video Printers Six Months (or sooner) - Clean Printhead, Rollers & sensor.
Fans Six Months - Check for good air flow without excessive noise
Cart Clean as necessar y. Wheels have sealed bearings, no lubrication is
required
Preventive Six Months - Follow recommendations in this Chapter
Maintenance
Performance Twice per year
Assurance
6-10
Safet y and Test ing
Safety and Testing
Electrical Safety Checks

The tests described in the following paragraphs are recommended to be
performed as part of a comprehensive preventive maintenance program.They
must follow any major repair or upgrade procedure as a proven means of
detecting abnormalities that if undetected could prove dangerous to either
the patient or operator.
All tests can be performed using commercially available Safety Analyzer
test equipment. Basic measurements may also be performed with widely
available multifunction instruments like the HP 3469A multimeter or
equivalent.
The consistent use of a Safety Analyzer as a routine step in closing a
repair or upgrade is emphasized as a mandatory step if UL status is to
be maintained. The Safety Analyzer also proves to be an excellent
troubleshooting tool to detect abnormalities of line voltage and
grounding plus total current loads.
The limits referenced in these tests are those prescribed by UL,CSA and IEC.
Additional tests may be required according to local regulations.
Test # 1. - Chassis to Ground Resistance Test.

Using the diagram as a general guide, connect the test equipment.
HOT -
SYSTEM
UNDER
NEUTRAL -
TEST
GROUND WIRE
GREEN OR CHASSIS
GREEN/YELLOW GROUND
LIMIT: R = 200 MILLIOHMS MAX

300e036
6-11
Inspect the power cord for cracks and wear. Check that the third wire ground
resistance to the power plug is less than 0.15 ohm. Flex the power cord
during tests to detect intermittent changes in resistance value.
If the reading is greater than 0.15 ohm, check the Power Cord and
CA U TI O N
associated primary wiring.
A comprehensive Ground Impedance measurement may be performed using
the Safety Analyzer. The impedance test will drive a load current through the
ground wire while measuring the ac voltage drop across the entire length of
power cord to chassis ground. The reading will be directly in milliohms.
These procedures assume the use of a DEMPSEY 232D or equivalent

N O TE
Safety Analyzer. Other popular testers complying with IEC 601-1
used in Europe like Rigel, Metron or Gerb may require modifications
to the procedure. Follow the instructions of the instrument
manufacturer,
To make the chassis to power cord ground pin resistance test using the
Safety Analyzer, follow these steps:
Connect one set of KELVIN cables supplied with the analyzer between the
two red receptacles on the rear panel of the analyzer and chassis ground on
the system under test. Make sure this is a good solid ground and not part
of the RFI shielding.
Connect the analyzer to the wall socket and the system to the analyzer.
Set the polarity switch on the analyzer to the OFF/RESET position.
Set the MODE switch to the power cord resistance position.
Check to see that the Active Current Source light comes on. This light is
located in the analyzers main display and its purpose is to confirm that a
test current is being driven by mean of the KELVIN cable through the
ground wire in the power cord.
Read the ground impedance in milliohms on the digital display.
6-12
Test # 2. - Ground Wire Leakage Current Test

Using a Dempsey 232D electrical safety analyzer or equivalent, open up the
ground return at the power cord. Measure the Leakage current to ground. A
higher than limit reading may indicate a problem with the power cord or
associated connections in the primary power distribution circuits.
If the Dempsey is used for an extended length of time, it could be

CA U TI O N
damaged by the 15.0 amp current draw of the system.
HOT -
SYSTEM
UNDER
NEUTRAL -
TEST
GROUND AC Micro
GREEN OR ammeter
GREEN/YELLOW
MAIN POWER SWITCH ON
LIMITS: UL = 300 Microamps rms
IEC = 500 Microamps rms

300e039
Here are the steps necessary to complete the measurement:
Set the MODE switch to Case Leakage.
Remove the KELVIN cable used on the previous test.
Set the polarity switch to the NORM position.
Press the OPEN GROUND button.
Read measurement directly in micro-amps.
It is good practice to repeat the measurement with the polarity switch in
the REVERSE position.
6-13
Test # 3. - ECG Patient Lead Leakage Current Test

(Source)
With the ECG patient cable connected to the amplifier and the leads shorted
together, open the ground return and measure the patient current leakage.
Failure to meet the specified limits may point to a fault with the isolation of
the ECG amplifiers front end.
HOT
SYSTEM
UNDER
NEUTRAL
TEST
GROUND AC Micro
GREEN OR ammeter
GREEN/YELLOW MAIN POWER SWITCH ON

300e040
Relative to power ground, the test is performed as follows:
Connect all ECG leads to the system and analyzer.
Set the MODE switch to ECG.
Set lead selector to ALL .
Set polarity switch to NORM .
Open ground and take reading.
Repeat measurement with polarity switch in reverse position.
6-14
Test # 4. - Patient Lead Leakage Current Test with Mains

Voltage Applied (Sink)
Set up the equipment as shown and measure the patient lead leakage current
for all leads tied together while driving the leads with the line voltage. This is
a better test of the isolation provided by the ECG amplifier since it takes into
account the possibility of high voltage breakdown.
ECG
PATIENT
CABLE
HOT -
SYSTEM
UNDER
NEUTRAL -
TEST
AC Micro
GROUND ammeter
GREEN OR
GREEN/YELLOW MAIN POWER SWITCH ON
MAINS
VOLTAGE

300e045
Please note that there is considerable hazard in performing this test. Use
CA U TI O N
precautionary measures to avoid accidental contact with the line voltage. In
addition, any time that the ground connection has been opened, do not touch
the chassis or patient cable during the test.
Follow these steps with care:
Set lead selector to ISOLATION TEST.
Disconnect all ECG leads.
Depress the RED button and take a reading. This is a correction factor to
be subtracted from the final reading.
Reconnect all ECG leads.
Depress the RED button and take a reading
Subtract the previous reading to get an accurate leakage measurement.
6-15
Transesophageal (TEE) Transducer Safety Testing.
In order to insure patient safety during the TEE Imaging procedure, it is very
important that the integrity of the insulating layers of the transducer be
verified.
Before proceeding with an electrical safety test, make sure to perform a
thorough visual test and to check the mechanical deflection characteristics
of the transducer. Before each use, the transducer should be inspected with a
gloved hand to detect any bumps or other defects.
The procedure offered here also verifies the integrity of the ultrasound
system used, and is convenient in the sense that the system provides the
required connections to the transducer.
See Figure 6-1 for TEE component identification.
Figure 6-1
DEFLECTION
CONTROLS
CONTROL HOUSING
DISTAL TIP
SYSTEM DEFLECTION AREA
CONNECTOR
CABLE FLEXIBLE SHAFT
TRANSDUCER
CONNECTOR
6fcl019.fm
TEE Transducer Component Identification
6-16
Refer to Figures and the description that follows to perform the

measurement.
Tools Required
Before starting, you must have the following items at hand:
❏ Safety analyzer.
❏ Saline holder with electrode.
❏ Saline solution mixed as per instructions.
Figure 6-2
Electrical Safety Test Tube
6-17
Saline Solution
When performing the test, a saline solution is required as a conductive

medium. The solution will provide an electrical path between a submerged
test electrode and the inner transducer shield (grounded via the system
connector). This will only be true if the insulation or Sheath is
damaged.
If Saline solution is not available pre-mixed, make your own using ordinary
table salt (sodium chloride).
Mix: 27 grams of salt (one ounce) / 3 liters of water
For the test to be effective, submerge 100 cm of the probe in the solution. Be
very careful to prevent saline solution from coming in contact with
the control handle! If liquid gets inside the deflection control mechanism,
corrosion and failure will follow. In some cases, it may be of some advantage
to introduce the transducer slowly into the solution so that the precise
location of the cut or puncture allowing the saline to come in contact with
the grounded shield may be found.
6-18
Figure 6-3
ULTRASOUND INSULATING
METAL LAYER
INTERNAL
HOT I CHASSIS METAL
PARTS
NEUTRAL
TEE
C TRANSDUCER
100 cm
GROUND I
SAFETY ANALYZER
S
I TEST
SALINE
A ELECTRODE
I
300e046-JVM
Electrical Safety Testing - Interconnections
Line power source, 110 or 220 volts ac.
C= Stray capacitance from the system's power wiring to chassis.
Z= Impedance between the Transducers metal parts and the test electrode.
A= Microameter (Safety Analyzer).
I= current caused by line voltage and stray capacitance C . (Or impedance Z
in the case of TEE probe measurement).
S= switch connecting the ammeter either directly to the chassis or through
the test electrode. (This switch is part of the Safety Analyzer).
6-19
Theory
Current I, driven by the line supply, flows through the stray capacitance
between the primary wiring and the systems metal chassis. Ordinarily, the
current then flows from the chassis, through S and back to the supply via the
third wire ground. When S is thrown in the other position, the current is
forced from the chassis, through the metal parts of the TEE Transducer,
(through the impedance Z, presented by the insulating layers which covers
the grounded metal parts of the transducer and the Saline solution) to the
test electrode.
The Saline solution presents an impedance of about 500 ohms, so Z will vary
between 850 Kohm; and 500 ohms, depending on whether or not there is a
conductive path caused by a hole or cut in the insulating layers of the
Transducer shaft.
To summarize:
First a measurement is made of chassis leakage current without the

transducer. The result is then compared with a second measurement when
the path is forced through impedance C and Z (via the transducer).
If the second measurement is greater than 80% of the system leakage

recorded in the first measurement, the transducer fails the test and should be
replaced.
6-20
Detailed Procedure and Test Results
This procedure assumes the use of a DEMPSEY 232D or equivalent

N O TE
Safety Analyzer. Other popular testers used in Europe may require
modifications to the procedure.
Follow the instructions of the instrument manufacturer.
1 Fill the test tube with an adequate amount of saline solution. Special test
tubes will have a fill line.
2 Carefully submerge up to 100 cm of the flexible shaft in the solution.
3 Plug the system's power cord into the safety analyzer test receptacle. Set
the analyzer for a leakage test following the manufacturers instructions.
4 Attach a test lead from the Safety Analyzer post labeled "RL" to the bind-
ing post on the test tube. The binding post in the test tube is connected to
an electrode in contact with the saline solution.
5 On the Safety Analyzer, set the Leads switch to RL and the Polarity
switch to NORMAL. The MODE switch should be set to CASE LEAK-
AGE - GROUND CONDUCTOR.
6 Turn on the Safety Analyzer and the ultrasound system.
7 Press the "Lift Ground" button on the analyzer and record the chassis
leakage (This measurement will vary depending if a chart recorder is
installed). The reading will be around 50 microamps. (100 microamps for
220V).
8 Set the MODE switch on the Analyzer to ECG position
9 Press the "Lift Ground" button again and record the reading. If the Transe-
sophageal transducer is in good condition as far as the insulating proper-
ties of the sheath, the reading will be significantly lower than the
previously recorded chassis leakage. If the reading is greater than 80% of
the chassis measurement, the test is failed and the transducer should be
replaced without further use.
6-21
Epiaortic Transducer Safety Testing

Use a safety analyzer to perform the leakage current tests required by the IEC
601-1 CF rating (VDE 0751 in Germany, Risk class 3 in Canada). If the
transducer fails, it is damaged and must be exchanged. Also, if the transducer
fails, instruct the end-user not to use the transducer for intraoperative exams,
and do not apply the CF label. If the transducer meets the CF current leakage
limits, apply the CF sticker (heart in a box icon) on the transducer label over
the BF designation (stick figure in a box icon). The part number for the CS
sticker is 21200-80130.
Some safety analyzers such as the Metron QE 80, used widely in Europe,
perform the tests automatically. If you use a safety analyzer such as the
Dynatech Nevada (Dempsey) 232 or equivalent which does not test
automatically, perform the following two tests:
Transducer Leakage Current Test (Source)

1 Plug the safety analyzer into power.
2 Plug the ultrasound system into the safety analyzer.
3 Connect the transducer being tested to the ultrasound system.
4 Immerse 5 centimeters of the transducer into saline solution. *
5 Set the safety analyzer Mode switch to the ECG position.
6 Set the Safety analyzer Leads switch to All (all ECG leads) position.
7 Connect a lead to any ECG terminal on the safety analyzer and immerse
the other end into the saline solution.
8 Set the safety analyzer Polarity switch to Normal.
9 Hold the safety analyzer Ground Open switch in the Open position and
note the leakage reading on the output display. The leakage must be less
than the limits in the next step.
10 Repeat the measurement with the Polarity switch in the Reverse posi-
tion. The leakage must be less than the following limits:
UL: 10 microamps rms (U.S. and Canada)
IEC: 50 microamps rms (Outside U.S. and Canada)
* If premixed saline solution is not available, mix 27 grams of salt (one

ounce) with three liters of water.
6-22
Transducer Leakage Current Test with Mains Voltage

applied (Sink)
1 Plug the safety analyzer into power.
2 Plug the ultrasound system into the safety analyzer.
3 Connect the transducer being tested to the ultrasound system.
4 Immerse 5 centimeters of the transducer into saline solution.
5 Set the safety analyzer Mode switch to the ECG position.
6 Set the safety analyzer Leads switch to the Isolation Test position.
7 Connect a lead to any ECG terminal on the safety analyzer. Leave the
other end of the lead disconnected for now.
8 Hold the Isolation Test button down and note the leakage reading on the
output display. This is the correction factor which will be subtracted from
the final reading.
9 Immerse the other end of the lead into the saline solution.
10 Hold the Isolation Test button down and take the leakage measurement.
This leakage must be less than the following limits:
UL: 20 microamps rms (U.S. and Canada)

IEC: 50 microamps rms (Outside U.S. and Canada)
6-23
6-24
7 Wiring & Cabling
System Cabling
This Chapter provides reference information for M2406A system cabling.
Information is supplied for cables that interconnect externally between
system I/O panels, and for cables that interconnect internally between system
PC boards.
Information provided in this Chapter is not duplicated in Chapter 8, Parts

Lists & Exploded Views.
Internal E-Box Cables

Table 7-1 provides a from-to list of internal cables that interconnect to
several PCBs in the E-Box section of the system.
External E-Box Cables

Table 7-2 provides a from-to list of external cables that interconnect from
the rear of the E-Box to other M2406A subsystems and peripherals. Some of
the listed cables interface to the E-Box rear panel I/OPCB; the remaining
cables interface to additional E-Box rear panel connectors. All of the listed
E-Box cables are referenced in Figure 7-1.
Keyprocessor Electronics Cables

Table 7-3 provides a from-to list of internal cables that interconnect from
several PCBs in the Keyprocessor Electronics section of the system. All of
the listed cables are referenced in Figure 7-1.
7-1
Wiring & Cabling
System Cabling
Table 7-1 Internal E-Box Cables
Cable Connections
Cable Name Cable Part #
From ............................................To
Digital Ribbon Cable 77100-64560 Scanner I/O Digital Control TGC

Analog Ribbon Cable 77100-64550 Scanner I/O Image Detector
FE Power Cable Assembly 77100-64210 Rear Panel J2 FE Motherboard
BE Power Cable Assembly 77100-64500 Rear Panel BE Motherboard
Doppler Detector Cable 77100-64520 CW Connector on Doppler Detector
FE Motherboard
(under Distr. PCB)
Digital Ground Cable 77100-64470 PCB Divider Digital Control PCB
Ground Pin
Fan Control Cable 77100-64510 Motherboard (FE) Fan Control PCB
(FE scanner)
Fan Control Cable 77100-64300 Motherboard (BE) Fan Control PCB
(BE Scan Converter)
Thermal Sensor Cable 77100-64330 BE Motherboard & Thermistor
Elephant Trunk
scan Converter
Power
AQ Internal Cable 77100-64530 E-Box Rear Panel AQ Split PCB
(AQ)
DSR Ribbon Cable 77100-64450 E-Box Rear Panel DSR PCB
(DSR)
AQ/Split Cable 77100-64540 Scanner I/O Pin AQ Split PCB Pin
7-2
Wiring & Cabling
System Cabling
Table 7-2 External E-Box Cables

Cable Cable Connections
Ref # Cable Name Cable Part # From E-Box: .... .......................To:
W1 SVHS Aux/VCR 77921-64020 Rear I/O (C15) PCB OEM VCR and
S-Video System I/O PCB
W2 Video Internal 77100-64103 Rear I/O (C15) PCB OEM Printer(s)
RGB Internal
W3 RGB Monitor 77921-64010 Rear I/O (C15) PCB Monitor Rear Panel,
RGB Monitor RGB BNCs
W4 Video RGB Aux 77100-64102 Rear I/O (C15) PCB System I/O PCB,
RGB Auxiliary RGB BNCs
W5 Stripchart 77921-64290 Rear I/O (C15) PCB Stripchart Recorder
Strip Chart
W6 Physio 77921-64080 Rear I/O (C15) PCB Main I/O (K5) PCB,
Audio/Physio J7 - Physio
W7 RS232 77921-64060 Rear I/O (C15) PCB Main I/O (K5) PCB,
KP Serial J6 - RS232
W8 Printer Control 77100-64340 Rear I/O (C15) PCB OEM Printer(s)
(RS232) Aux 1 Serial
W9 NA NA Blank Not Used
W10 AQ External 77921-64340 E-Box Rear Panel System I/O PCB,
AQ Output AQ/IF
W11 SCSI System 92222B E-Box Rear Panel Digital Storage Retrieval
DSR Output or Digital Network
Interface
W12 Elephant Trunk, 77101-64310 E-Box Rear Panel Tectrol Power Supply
Scanner Power J2 (Front End)
W13 Elephant Trunk, 77101-64320 E-Box Rear Panel Tectrol Power Supply
Scan Cnvrtr Pwr (Back End)
Note: External E-Box cables are shown in Figure 7-1
7-3
Wiring & Cabling
System Cabling
Table 7-3 Keyprocessor Electronics Cabling

Ref # From......................................To
Cables from Physio I/O (K3) and Physio (K2) PCBs
W14 10-pin Physio, 9 77921-64182 Physio I/O (K3) PCB Keyscanner (K1) PCB
P8
W15 10-pin Physio, 3 77921-64181 Physio I/O (K3) PCB Physio (K2) PCB
Middle Connector
W16 Physio to I/O 77921-64190 Physio I/O (K3) PCB Physio (K2) PCB
W17 60-pin Physio 77921-64300 Physio (K2) PCB Keyscanner (K1) PCB
P7
Cables from Keyscanner (K1) PCB
W14 10-pin Physio, 9 77921-64182 Keyscanner (K1) PCB Physio I/) (K3) PCB
P8
W17 60-pin Physio 77921-64300 Keyscanner (K1) PCB Physio (K2) PCB
P7
W18 EL Ribbon 77921-64140 Keyscanner (K1) PCB Left Touch Screen
P6 (K11)
W19 EL Ribbon 77921-64140 Keyscanner (K1) PCB Right Touch Screen
P5 (K11)
W20 60-pin Keyscanner 77921-64310 Keyscanner (K1) PCB Qwerty (K9) PCB
P2
W21 60-pin Keyscanner 77921-64310 Keyscanner (K1) PCB Function (K7) PCB
P4
W22 Control Cable 77921-64150 Keyscanner (K1) PCB Qwerty (K9) PCB
P3
Cables from Main I/O (K5) PCB
W6 Physio 77921-64080 Main I/O (K5) PCB, Rear I/O PCB (E-Box)
J7 - Physio Audio/Physio
7-4
Wiring & Cabling
System Cabling
Table 7-3 Keyprocessor Electronics Cabling (Continued)

Ref # From......................................To
W7 RS232 77921-64060 Main I/O (K5) PCB, Rear I/O PCB (E-Box),
J6 - RS232 KP Serial
W23 Main I/O to 77921-64070 Main I/O (K5) PCB Right Speaker
Speaker J16
W23 Main I/O to 77921-64070 Main I/O (K5) PCB Left Speaker
Speaker J17
W24 12V Filter Cable 77921-64280 Main I/O (K5) PCB 12V Filter (K6) PCB
J18 J1
W25 Controller DC 77921-64120 Main I/O (K5) PCB Tectrol Power Supply
J9
W26 System I/O 77921-64050 Main I/O (K5) PCB System I/O PCB
J15
W27 VCR Remote 77921-64040 Main I/O (K5) PCB VCR
Control J21
W28 Audio Cable from 77000-60580 Main I/O (K5) PCB VCR
VCR Right J11
W28 Audio Cable from 77000-60580 Main I/O (K5) PCB VCR
VCR Left J12
W28 Audio Cable to 77000-60580 Main I/O (K5) PCB VCR
VCR Right J13
W28 Audio Cable to 77000-60580 Main I/O (K5) PCB VCR
VCR Left J14
W29 Trackball Control 77120-65660 Qwerty Trackball
W30 Mic Control 77921-64130 Qwerty Mic
Network Cables
W31 Internal LAN 77470-60030 Digital Network System I/O Panel

Interface
Note: Keyprocessor Electronics cables are shown in Figure 7-1
7-5
Wiring & Cabling
System Cabling
Figure 7-1 Cabling Diagram , External E-Box & Keyprocessor Electronics
7-6
Wiring & Cabling
Primary Cart Wiring
Primary Cart Wiring

Line voltage is directed to a terminal strip that allows interconnection of
necessary line filter elements, as shown in Figure 7-2.
A double pole circuit breaker connects the line to the load via isolation
transformer T1.
The input side of the isolation transformer may be wired to accept a number
of different line voltages. Figure 7-2 shows jumper location and wiring data.
The secondary of the transformer is wired to always deliver 120 VAC

and 240 VAC (optional) to the cart mounted outlets.
CAUTION
Assure that all terminal strip screws for power connections,
including transformer mounted terminal strips, are tight. A setting
of 10 inch/Lbs is factory set and specified as the recommended
torque. The use of a torque screwdriver is strongly recommended
7-7
Wiring & Cabling
Primary Cart Wiring
Figure 7-2 Primary Line Wiring Diagram

mf
.0
20
lc
f6
7-8
Wiring & Cabling
Primary Cart Wiring
Table 7-4 VCR Parallel Cable 77921-64040 Pinout

From Main I/O (K5) PCB, J21 TO VCR
Pin Pin Function
1 1 Rec Switch
2 2 Play Switch
3 3 FF Switch
4 4 Rewind Switch
5 5 Stop Switch
6 6 N/C
7 7 Pause Switch
8 8 N/C
12 12 Ground
14 14 Reverse Count
18 18 Control Pulse
21 21 Eject Switch
23 23 Rec Hold
24 24 Play Hold
25 25 FF Hold
26 26 Rewind Hold
29 29 Pause Hold
34 34 Plus 12V
Power Trunk Cables Wiring Guide

In the event that Power Trunk cables between the main power supply and the
E-Box must be replaced, see Figures 7-3 through 7-5 for wiring information.
7-9
Wiring & Cabling
Primary Cart Wiring
Figure 7-3 Trunk Cable Wiring Detail - Internal to E-Box
7-10
Wiring & Cabling
Primary Cart Wiring
Figure 7-4 Trunk Cable Wiring Detail - Front End (Scanner)
7-11
Wiring & Cabling
Primary Cart Wiring
Figure 7-5 Trunk Cable Wiring Detail - Back End (Scan Converter))
7-12
8 Parts Lists & Exploded Views
Introduction
This section lists available supplies, accessories, and replacement parts for
the Model M2406A Ultrasound Imaging System. A series of exploded view
diagrams which support many of the parts listings are also included, where
required for reference.
The content of this chapter is based on latest information available at the

time of issue and is subject to change. Updated information may be issued
periodically. The issue date at the front of this manual provides a reference
point for all information provided herein.
Parts Ordering
Address all parts orders or inquiries to your local Hewlett-Packard Sales/
Service Office. Always specify the correct part number or exchange number
for the sub-assembly or component being ordered, as well as the serial and
revision numbers of the system in which the assembly is being installed or
replaced:
New Parts
Be sure to specify the correct sub-assembly or component part number, as
listed throughout this Chapter.
Exchange Parts
Certain PC boards, transducers and OEM peripherals are available as an
exchange item (i.e. a repaired or refurbished item), providing significant
cost savings. Exchange item part numbers are different than original equip-
ment part numbers, as referenced in appropriate tables throughout this
Chapter.
System Serial Number and Revision Level

When ordering any new or exchange part, be sure to include the system
serial number and revision prefix. These can be found on the system ID
label, located inside the left rear corner post of the cart. The ID label also
identifies installed system options.
8-1
Parts Lists & Exploded Views
MCS Supplies & Accessories

Table 8-1 lists M2406A supplies and accessories that are available from
Hewlett-Packards Medical Customer Support (MCS) organization. To order
any of these items within the USA, contact MCS at 1-800-225-0230. From
other countries, contact your local HP representative or sales office.
Table 8-1 MCS Supplies & Accessories

Description Part Number Comments
Physio
Patient Cable-Lead Set-USA M1603A 3 leads-30 inch-Grabbers
Patient Cable-Lead Set-EUR M1613A 3 leads-30 inch.-Grabbers
Patient Cable-Trunk-USA M1580A 3 lead.
Patient Cable-Trunk-EUR M1590A 3 lead.
Patient Cable-Lead Set-USA M1605A 3 leads-30 inch-Snaps
Patient Cable-Lead Set-EUR M1615A 3 leads-30 inch-Snaps
Patient Cable M1613A 3 lead-Pediatric
Patient Cable-Lead Set M1619A IEC Pediatric Lead Set
Patient Cable-Lead Set M1609A USA Pediatric Lead Set
Foam Electrodes, Pre-Gelled 40420A 100 pack.
Foam Electrodes, Pre-Gelled 40493C 3 pack.
Foam Electrodes, Pre-Gelled 40493E 30 pouch.
Cloth Electrodes, Pre-Gelled 13941C 3 pack.
Cloth Electrodes, Pre-Gelled 13944B 3 pack-recommended substi-
tute for 40420A.
8-2
Table 8-1 MCS Supplies & Accessories (Continued)

Printer Paper
77530A Color Thermal Printer 13993A 5 packs per box / 80 prints
77530B/77535B Printer, Color-PAL/NTSC 21002A 500 Color Sheets
77530B/77535B Printer, Color-PAL/NTSC 21003A 500 B/W Sheets
77535A Color Thermal Printer 13994A 5 packs per box. Europe.
77550A/B/77555A Color Thermal Printer 13991A Case of 5 boxes, 100 prints
77550A/B/77555A Color Thermal printer 13992A B&W print pack, same qty.
77550C/77555C Color Thermal printer 21006A Box, 200 sheets
77550C/77555C Color Thermal printer 21007A Case of 5 boxes
Strip Chart Paper
77510A Kowa Thermal paper 40479A Box of 4 rolls, 131 foot (40m)
per roll.
B&W Printer Paper
77560A/77565A (NTSC/PAL Small) M2236A 5 rolls per box
77560B (NTSC/PAL) 21005A 5 rolls per box
77580A/77585A (NTSC/PAL Large) M2237A 5 rolls per box
Ultrasound Gel
Aquasonic Gel 40483A 12, 8.5 Oz. bottle
Aquasonic Gel 40483B 1, 5 liter bottle.
Video Tape
VHS Tape-T120 Maxell 13920A 1/2 inch, single unit.
VHS Tape-T120 Maxell 13920B Same as above, case of 10
tapes.
SVHS Tape-SQ-T120 13921A 1/2 inch, single unit.
SVHS Tape-SQ-T120 13921B Same as above, case of 10
tapes.
8-3
Table 8-1 MCS Supplies & Accessories (Continued)

Other Supplies
TEE Sheath Kits 40487A 10 Sheaths/kit
TEE Sheath Kits 40487E 10 Sheaths/kit (Europe only).
TEE Sheath Kits-Mini M2201A 10 Sheaths/kit
TEE Sheath Kits-Mini M2204A 10 Sheaths/kit (Europe only).
Bite Guards M1828A 24 per case
Bite Guards-Mini M2203A 24 per case
Blank Optical Disk (1X media) C2588A For DSR or Digital Network
Interface option, 8/pack
Blank Optical Disk (2X media) C2588T For DSR or Digital Network
Blank Optical Disk (4X media) C2588F For DSR or Digital Network
TEE Tip Protector M2243A Omni I, Box 24
TEE Tip Protector M2273A Omni II, Box 24
8-4
SMO/ PCE Parts and Accessories
SMO/PCE Parts and Accessories

All parts and accessories listed throughout the remaining pages in this
Chapter are available fromHewlett-Packards SMO (Support Material
Organization) and PCE (Part Center Europe) organizations. To order any of
the listed items from within the USA, call 1-800-227-8164. From other
countries, contact your local HP representative or sales office.
Transducer Exchange
Table 8-2 provides a list of M2406A compatible transducers, along with their
exchange part numbers.
Table 8-2 Transducer Exchange Part Numbers

HP Model No. Frequency Exchange Part #
Transthoracic Transducers
21202A 2.5/2.0 MHz 21202-68000

21205C 3.5 MHz 21205-68200
21210B 5.0 MHz, Medium 21210-68100
21211B 5.0 MHz, Short 21211-68100
21215A 2.5/2.0MHz, with Dynamic Elevation Beam Forming 21215-68000
21242A 3.5/2.7 MHz, Long 21242-68000
21243A 3.5/2.7 MHz, with Dynamic Elevation Beam Forming 21243-68000
21245A 5.0/3.7 MHz, with Dyamic Elevation Beam Forming 21245-68000
21246A 5.0 MHz, Long 21246-68000
21253A 3.5 MHz, Curvilinear 21253-68000
21253B 5.0/3.5/3.0/2.5 MHz, Curvilinear 21253-68100
21255A 4.5 MHz, Linear 21255-68000
8-5
Table 8-2 Transducer Exchange Part Numbers (Continued)

HP Model No. Frequency Exchange Part #
21255B 4.5/3.7 MHz, Trapezoidal 21255-68100
21258A 7.5 MHz, Linear 21258-68000
21258B 7.5/5.5 MHz, Trapezoidal 21258-68100
21273A 7.5/5.0/3.5 MHz, Curvilinear 21273-68000
21275A 7.5/5.5 MHz, Short 21275-68000
Separate Doppl er Tran sducers
21221A 1.9 MHz, Doppler only Exchange not avail.

Order 21221-60061.
21223A 5.0 MHz, Doppler only Exchange not avail.

Order 21223-60060.
21228A 1.9 MHz, Transcranial Doppler. (TCD) Exchange not avail.

Order 21228-60060.
TE E Tran sd ucers
21363A 5.0 MHz, Bi-plane 21363-68000
21364A 5.0/3.7 MHz, Omni TEE 21364-68000
21365A 5.0 MHz, Mini TEE 21365-68000
21366A 7.5/5.5 MHz, Pediatric BiPlane, TEE 21366-68000
21367A 6.2/5.0 MHz, Omni II TEE 21367-68000
8-6
Transducer Parts/Accessories
In addition to stocking transducers on exchange, HP also stocks some

replaceable transducer parts and accessories, as listed in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3 Transducer Parts/Accessories

Acce ss ories
TEE Care Booklet 21364-99740 For ALL languages
TEE Care Video Tape 21364-99790 English/NTSC

21364-99780 English/PAL
21364-99791 French/NTSC
21364-99795 Spanish/NTSC
21364-99781 French/PAL
21364-99782 German/PAL
21364-99784 Italian/PAL
21364-99785 Spanish/PAL
Foam insert, Omni I Suitcase 21364-80050 For Hard suitcase
Soft-sided Suitcase 21364-80080 Omni I & II, & Pedi TEE
Tag, Omni I 21364-80090 Use w/soft case
Tag, Omni II 21367-80090 Use w/soft case
Tag, PTEE 21366-80090 Use w/soft case
Omni I TEE Foam Bottom 21364-80070 For soft suitcase
Omni II TEE Foam Bottom 21367-80070 For soft suitcase
Omni I TEE Tip Protectors M2243A 21364A only/Box 24
Omni II TEE Tip Protectors M2273A 21367A only/Box 24
Mono & Biplane Suitcase 91-5044-12-ACM No foam insert
Mono & Biplane Insert 21363-80035 Mono/Biplane Suitcase
PTEE Foam Insert 21366-80070 Bottom, for soft case
PTEE Tip Protector 21366-80150
8-7
Table 8-3 Transducer Parts/Accessories (Continued)

PTEE Cable Ring Clamp 21366-24280
Mini TEE Suitcase 080G56800-OLD
Mini TEE Case Foam 080G56900-OLD Lower half
Mini TEE Case Foam 080G57000-OLD Upper half
TEE Connector cover kit 21364-65500 Fits ALL TEE probe connectors
TEE Disinfection Basin 21110A All TEE probes

TEE Basin base 21110-40010
TEE Basin lid 21110-40020
Small connector insert 21110-40030
Trans ducer Repair Parts/To ol s
CF Rating Sticker 21200-80130 Epiaortic transducers
Transducer Label 21364-00270 Do not Submerse
Omni Large Knob 21364-83080
Omni Small Knob 21364-83090
Ellipse Ring 21364-63070 For Omni I (order next part too)
Ellipse Rings Hook 21364-24235 For Omni I (order prev. part too)
Ellipse Ring 21367-63070 For Omni II (21367A)
Ellipse Rings Hook 21367-24235 For Omni II (21367A)
Label Mounting Kit 21246-60500
Biplane Vertical label 21363-00260 For all languages
Biplane Horizontal label 21363-00270 For all languages
RFI Transducer Shield Kit 21200-80300
Top RFI Connector-Latch Side. 21246-00020 Plate, signal / ground, (front).
Bottom RFI Connector-Non Latch 21246-00130 Plate, signal / ground, (rear).
Transducer Dot Test Block 77020-20030 Lucite/short
8-8
Table 8-3 Transducer Parts/Accessories (Continued)

Transducer Dot Test Block 77020-20010 Lucite/long
Transducer Connector Cover 21246-60310
Transducer Blank Label 21200-80110 For all 212XX series Xducers.
Transducer Latch 1252-4254
Latch Removal Tool 21246-62010
Xducer Dot, Index Button, Black 21200-40021 21200C/21202A/21215A
Xducer Dot, Index Button, Red 21200-40022 21205B-C/21242A/21243A
Xducer Dot, Index Button, Green 21200-40023 21275A
Xducer Dot, Index Button, Blue 21200-40024 21210A-B/21211A-B
Xducer Dot, Index Button, White 21200-40025 21225A
Serial Label, blank 21215-80110 For 21215A/21243A/21245A
Connector Housing, Left 21215-40010 For 21215A/21243A/21245A
Connector Housing, Right 21215-40020 For 21215A/21243A/21245A
8-9
OEM Instrument Exchange
Table 8-4 lists M2406A compatible OEM instruments and their exchange part
numbers.
Table 8-4 OEM Peripheral Exchange Part Numbers

HP Model # Application Notes Exchange Part #
77450A Digital Storage 594 Mbyte Optical Disc NA
77450B Digital Storage Optical Disc 77450-68100
77470A Digital Network Interface HP D3962A NA
77510A Strip Chart-B&W Kowa TLR-111 NA
77530A Printer-Color-NTSC Sony UP3000 77530-68000
77530B Printer-Color-NTSC Sony-UP-1850MD-NTSC 77530-68100
77535A Printer-Color-PAL Sony UP3000P 77535-68000
77535B Printer-Color-NTSC Sony-UP-1850EPM-PAL 77535-68100
77550A Printer-Color-NTSC Sony UP5000 NA
77550B Printer-Color-NTSC Sony UP5200MD 77550-68001
77550C Printer-Color-NTSC Sony-UP-5600MD 77550-68200
77555A Printer-Color-PAL Sony UP-5000P NA
77555C Printer-Color-PAL Sony-UP-5600MDP 77555-68200
77560A Printer-B&W-NTSC Sony UP 870-Small 77560-68000
77560B Printer-B&W-PAL & NTSC Sony UP 890 77560-68200
77565A Printer-B&W-PAL Sony UP 860-Small 77565-68000
77580A Printer-B&W-NTSC Sony UP 910-Large 77580-68000
77585A Printer-B&W-PAL Sony UP 910/P-Large 77585-68000
77612A VCR-SVHS-NTSC Panasonic-7300 77612-68000
8-10
Table 8-4 OEM Peripheral Exchange Part Numbers (Continued)

HP Model # Application Notes Exchange Part #
77613A VCR-SVHS-NTSC Panasonic-7350 77613-68000
77615A VCR-SVHS-NTSC Panasonic-AG-MD830P 77615-68000
77622A VCR-SVHS-PAL Panasonic-7330E 77622-68000
77623A VCR-SVHS-PAL Panasonic-7350E 77623-68000
77625A VCR-SVHS-PAL Panasonic-AG-MD830E 77625-68000
Replaceable OEM Instrument Parts
In addition to stocking OEM instruments on exchange, HP also stocks some

replaceable parts for these instruments. Theses parts are stocked and
identified using the OEM part number (as listed in the OEM manufacturers
service manual), with the first three letters of the manufacturer added as a
suffix.
For example:
VXA4504-PAN refers to a Panasonic part.
A8261-099-A-SON refers to a Sony part.
When ordering an OEM part from HP, obtain the correct part number from
the OEM manufacturers service manual and add the appropriate suffix. Or, if
the manufacturer does not list the part in their service manual, provide the
following information to your HP parts supplier:
1 Instrument model number and serial number
2 Description, of the part, including its function and location.
3 Product Line-76
4 Supplying Division-2900
8-11
OEM Instrument Manuals
HP is no longer stocking OEM service manuals. These manuals should be

ordered directly from the OEM vendor within your respective countries.
8-12
PC Board Allocation and Exchange
Table 8-5 lists all M2406A PC boards and their HP part numbers, plus an
exchange part number for each board available on exchange.
Exchange PCB's:
Notice in the table that exchange part numbers are the same as the HP part
number for each board, except that the last digit changes to 8. For example, if
you order the Transmit Power Supply board-A8 (see below), the installed HP
Part number (unless it was previously replaced) is 77100-62700. The
Exchange Part number for the same PCB is 77100-62708. Thus, if you replace
a PCB with the number 8 as the last digit in the part number, you know that
that PCB was previously replaced.
.
NOTE
Refer to Figure 8-1 for PC board allocation within the system
Table 8-5 PC Board Listing with Exchange Part Numbers

ID HP Part # Description Exchange Part #
Scanner Back End Section (see Figure 8-1)

A0 77100-60140 Scanner Section, Motherboard NA
A1 77100-XXXX Empty
A2,3 77100-60520 Coarse Delay, 200ns (Rev A) 77100-60528
A2,3 77100-60550 Coarse Delay, 200ns (Rev B) 77100-60558
A4,6 77100-60540 Coarse Delay, flat tap (Rev A) 77100-60548
A4,6 77100-60570 Coarse Delay, flat tap (Rev B) 77100-60578
A5,7 77100-60530 Coarse Delay, 100ns (Rev A) 77100-60538
A5,7 77100-60560 Coarse Delay, 100ns (Rev B) 77100-60568
A8 77100-62700 Transmit Power Supply 77100-62708
A9 77100-61210 PV/Omni Power Supply 77100-61218
8-13

A9 77100-61220 PV/Omni Power Supply 77100-61228
A10 77100-XXXX Empty
A11 77100-60670 Image Detector #2 * 77100-60678
A12 77100-61180 Doppler Detector 77100-61188
A13 77100-60660 Image Detector # 1 77100-60668
A14 77100-67500 Fan Control PCB-Rear NA
Scanner Front End Section (see Figure 8-1)

B1-2 77100-60440 Fine Delay 77100-60448
B3-10 77100-60330 Front End 77100-60338
B11-12 77100-60440 Fine Delay 77100-60448
B13 77100-60930 TGC / DA-TGC 77100-60938
B14 77100-60840 Digital Control 77100-60848
B15 77100-60250 Distribution PCB 77100-60258
Scan Converter Section (see Figure 8-1)

C0 77100-65010 Motherboard, Scan Converter (Use
77160-65030)
C0 77160-65030 Motherboard, Scan Converter NA
C1 77100-66280 Processor Graphics 77100-66288
C2 77100-65800 Black & White Cine Loop Review * 77100-65808
C3 77100-65900 Color Cine Loop Review (Rev A)* 77100-65908
C3 77100-65810 Combined Cine Loop Review (Rev B)* 77100-65818
C4 77100-66010/20 Video I/O, NTSC/PAL 77100-66018/28
C5 77100-65700 Physio-Video-Timing (PVT) 77100-65708
C6 77100-66300 Strip Chart * 77100-66308
8-14

C7 77100-65610 Image Memory (Rev A) 77100-65618
C7 77160-65630 Image Memory (Rev B) 77160-65638
C8 77100-66380 AQ / Split * 77100-66388
C9 77160-65510 R-Theta (rev A) 77160-65518
C9 77100-65530 R-Theta (Rev B) 77100-65538
C10 NA Empty NA
C11 77100-65440 Flow Processor 77100-65448
C12 77100-65310 DSR * 77100-65318
C13 77100-65210 Doppler Processor 77100-65218
C14 77100-65150 Scanner I/O 77100-65158
C14 77160-65160 Scanner I/O 77160-65168
C15 77100-62740 Rear I/O NA
C16 77100-67500 Fan Control PCB-Front NA
Keyprocessor Electronics Section (see Figures 8-1 & 8-8)

K1 77921-60100 Keyscanner/Audio 77921-60108
K2 77921-60600 Physio, Extended (also see K2 below) NA
K2 77921-60620 Physio, Extended NA
K2 77921-60610 Physio, ECG/Aux only NA
K2 77921-60630 Physio, ECG/Aux only NA
K3 77921-60300 Physio I/O NA
K4 77921-60400 System I/O, PCB-not shown, located NA

at rear of system (also see K4 below)
K4 77100-66390 AQIF, PCB (also see K4 above) NA
K5 77921-60200 Main I/O N/A
K6 77921-60240 Filter Board, 12V NA
8-15

K7 77921-61400 Function NA
K8 77921-61800 Function LED Daughterboard NA
K9 77921-61300 Qwerty 77921-61308
K10 77921-61700 Qwerty LED Daughterboard NA
K11 77921-80030 Touch Screens-Left or Right NA
K12 2090-0330 EL Panels-Left or Right 77921-65008
Note: All boards listed with an asterisk (*) are optional.
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-16
Figure 8-1
PC Board Allocation,
E-Box & Keyprocessor Electronics
8-17
8-18
Miscellaneous Parts-PCB Fuses, Battery, Etc.
Table 8-6 lists PCB fuses, battery and other miscellaneous orderable parts.
NOTE
Fuses are replaceable by pulling them out of their terminals. Be sure
to use the appropriate value fuse during replacement.
Table 8-6 PCB Fuses, Battery & Other Miscellaneous Parts

Misc. Part Location Part(s) Description Part # Reference
Syst em Fus es
A8 PCB Fuse (2), 2.0 amp 2110-0684 See Figure 8-4

Transmit Pwr Supply
A9 PCB Fuse (2), 0.5 amp 2110-0716 See Figure 8-2

PV Pwr Supply
K5 PCB Fuse (8), 3.0 amp 2110-0688 See Figure 8-3

Main I/O Note: Fuse F8 is a spare .
C1 PCB Fuse (1) 2.0 amp 2110-0684 See Figure 8-5

Processor-Graphics
Syst em Bat tery
C1 PCB Battery, 3.5V 1420-0349 See Figure 8-5

Processor-Graphics Battery Cover 1400-1712
NA Battery Box 1400-1711
Misce ll an eo us
A0 & C0 PCB Screws (11) Scanner, Screws (9) 2360-0115, NA

Motherboards Scan Converter 2360-0115
NA Static Wipes 9300-1741 NA
Keyscanner PCB Cables Cable Clamps, Ribbon 1400-1717 NA
Cart Top Label, System ID 77921-80050 NA
N/A Footswitch (older style) 77000-65480 Label (77020-

80210)
8-19

NA Shield, transformer 77921-80411

NA Touch-up Paint (keyprocessor) 77921-87650
N/A Footswitch (new style) w/label 77921-62470 NA
N/A Physio Interface Cable Kit 77921-62480 NA
ECG Interface cable (TEE) Round ECG connector to 1/4 77020-60300
phone plug
ECG Modification Kit Kit to modify 77020-60300 above. 77020-60315
(includes 1/4 phone plug and
instructions)
Interface cable 37 pin D connector one end, no M1181-61651
connector on other end. Use with
77020-60315 above. Takes analog
output from Merlin monitor.
Static Wipes EL Touch Screen cleaner 9300-1741
Shipping material System Cover 77921-80130 N/A
Shipping material Keyboard Protect. Cover 77921-81061 N/A
Shipping material Corner Post Prot. - Left 77921-81063 N/A
Shipping material Corner Post Prot. - Right 77921-81064 N/A
Shipping material Lock Foot Bar Protector 77921-81065 N/A
System & DSR Filter Kit M2406-60007 N/A
N/A Torque screwdriver 1/4 preset to 02-0068-IRP N/A
10 inch/lbs
Distr. PCB Top edge of Xducer connectors 77100-41170 N/A
Keyprocessor Clamp, cable, KP 1400-1196 N/A
KPE Alum. Casting Touch-up Paint Glacier Gray 77921-87610 N/A
Cart Base Touch-up Paint, titanium gray 77921-87600 N/A
Cart Panel, Blank, 3.5, glac. gray 77921-07761 N/A
8-20


Cart Panel, Blank, 7, glac. gray 77921-07763 N/A
Cart Screw, 8X16mm, glac. gray 77921-22320 N/A
Cart Tinneman Nuts 0535-0093 N/A
Cart 3.5 Blank Panel 77450-00652 N/A
8-21
Figure 8-2
F102 F101
F102 = 0.5 amp, p/n 2110-0716 F101 = 0.5 amp, p/n 2110-0716 -JVM
300e065
PV Power Supply Board (A9) Fuses
Figure 8-3
Fuses F1-F7 = 3.0 amp, p/n 2110-0688
F5
F6
F1 F7
F2
F3
F4 F8 (spare)
300e064-JVM Fuse F8 is a spare

3.0 amp, p/n 2110-0688
Keyprocessor Electronics Main I/O Board (K5), Fuses
8-22
PCB Flash Card Connectors
Figure 8-4
Fuse (2 ea.), 2.0 amp, p/n 2110-0684

AAA
AAA
AAA
Transmit Power Supply Board (A8) Fuses

Connectors which permit programming via plug-in flash cards are located on
the following PC boards:
Processor Graphics (C1) PCB-see Figure 8-5
Keyscanner/Audio (K1) PCB-see Figure 8-6
Digital Control (B14) PCB-see Figure 8-7
8-23
Figure 8-5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Flash Card Connector
Set switch 7 on left DIP
XU6000 to UP position only for

F1
flash card programming
Battery, 3.5V, p/n 1420-0349

Battery Cover, p/n 1400-1712
Fuse F1, 2.0 amp, p/n 2110-0684
300e067-JVM
Processor-Graphics Board (C1) Fuse, Battery, and Flash Connector
Figure 8-6
ON
1 2 3 4
Set switch 3 to ON
(up) position only for 300e066-JVM
Keyscanner (K1) Board Flash Card Connector
8-24
Figure 8-7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Set switches 4 and 5 to

CLOSED position only for
Digital Control Board (B14) Flash Connector
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-25
Figure 8-7a
5gjl016
SET JUMPER TO
THE 750 POSITION
Scan Converter Motherboard System Type Jumper
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-26
I/O Panel/Keyprocessor Electronics Language Options
Table 8-7 lists part numbers for all I/O panels and Keyprocessor Electronics
controls. These components are available in English, as well as four foreign
languages. Notice that part numbers for similar panels/controls are the same
for each language, except the last digit which defines specific language
labeling.
English labeling-the last digit in the part number is always 0.

French labeling-the last digit in the part number changes to 1.
German labeling-the last digit in the part number changes to 2.
Italian labeling-the last digit in the part number changes to 4.
Spanish labeling-the last digit in the part number changes to 5.
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-27
Table 8-7 Language Option Labels

English French German Italian Spanish
Physio I/O Front Panels, Extended (system date code <3624A)

77921-00740 77921-00741 77921-00742 77921-00744 77921-00745
Physio I/O Front Panels, ECG & AUX Only (system date code <3624)
77921-00750 77921-00751 77921-00752 77921-00754 77921-00755
Physio I/O Assembly, Standard (system date code >3624)
77921-62670 77921-62671 77921-62672 77921-62674 77921-62675
Physio I/O Assembly, Extended (system date code >3624)
77921-62640 77921-62641 77921-62642 77921-62644 77921-62645
System I/O Rear Panels, Standard (see Table 8-13 for specific details)
77921-01440 77921-01441 77921-01442 77921-01444 77921-01445
System I/O Rear Panels, with AQ Dataport (see Table 8-13 for specific
details)
77921-01450 77921-01451 77921-01452 77921-01454 77921-01455
Qwerty Keyboard
77921-62300 77921-62301 77921-62302 77921-62304 77921-62305
Function Keyboard
77921-62350 77921-62351 77921-62352 77921-62354 77921-62355
8-28
Power Cord & Line Voltage/Circuit Breaker Options
Power Cord & Line Voltage/Circuit Breaker Options

Table 8-8 lists part numbers for system power cords and circuit breakers.
These items are optional, based on country requirements for cords and line
voltage.
Table 8-8 Power Cord & Line Voltage/Circuit Breaker Options

Option # Description Part Number Comments
Power Cords
900 (UK) Cable,cart #16. 77921-64220 Requires UK power connector 1251-4209.
901 (AU) Cable,cart #16. 77921-64220 Requires Aust. connector 1251-3921.
902 (EU) Cable,cart 77921-64230 Requires Western Europe connector

1251-5964.
903 (US/Japan) Cable, AC Power 77921-64200 Includes connector (1251-3133).
906 (SW) Cable,cart #16. 77921-64220 Requires Swiss connector 1251-4896.
912 (DK) Cable,cart #16. 77921-64220 Requires Danish connector 1251-6189.
917 (SA) Cable,cart #16. 77921-64220 Requires S.Africa connector 1251-1173.
NA Monitor power cord. 8120-4456 Use clamp 77000-05700.
NA Power cord tie wrap 1400-0399
Line Voltages Circuit Breakers

Z02 100 V 3105-0258, (20A)
Z03 120 V 3105-0258, (20A)
Z04 220 V 3105-0302, (10A) Includes 240V power strip 77921-64320,

Z05 230 V IEC bracket 77921-00970, expander strip
Z06 240 V 1252-5497.
8-29
Replacement Parts & Exploded View Diagrams

The following pages provide listings of replaceable M2406A sub-assemblies
and parts, keyed to exploded view diagrams. Only primary sub-assemblies
and parts that can be ordered from the factory are shown in the exploded
view diagram for each major assembly. Related hardware such as screws,
washers, etc. that can be ordered for each sub-assembly are called out in the
comments section of the associated parts tables.
Exploded view diagrams and associated parts list tables appear in the
following order:
Keyprocessor Electronics Assembly (K0)

Table 8-9 and Figure 8-8.
E-Box Assembly (E0)

E-Box Front Distribution Panel Assembly (E1)

Cart Top Assembly, Front View (T0)

Cart Top Assembly, Rear View (T1)

Cart Base Assembly (C0)

Cart Body Assembly, Front View (C1)

Cart Body Assembly, Rear View (C2)

Table 8-16 and Figure 8-15
Front Wheel & Brake Assembly (W0)

8-30
Parts Locator Reference Numbers

Note that each major assembly is referenced by a letter and a number.
For example:
E1 = E-Box Front Distribution Panel Assembly
Sub-assemblies for each major assembly have a dash-number following the

assembly number.
For example:
E1-1 = Bail Guide Interlock
The sub-assembly dash-numbers in each parts listing will appear in the

associated exploded view diagram.
NOTE
These Assembly and Sub-Assemblynumbers are used for parts locator
reference purposes only. They cannot be used to order parts; to order a part
you must supply the associated part number listed in the parts tables.
When using reference numbers to locate parts remember the following:
1 Assembly Reference Numbers:

Referenced by a letter and a number. Items are normally not ordered at
this level. In cases where a major assembly can be ordered, a part number
will be listed. The same letter may be followed by a different number to
indicate a different level of the same major assembly. The first number
used is always 0.
2 Sub-Assembly Reference Numbers:

Referenced by a dash-number. All parts referenced by a dash-number may
be ordered by supplying the associated part number.
3 Secondary Hardware:
Secondary parts and hardware such as washers, screws, etc. are some-
times listed in the comments column of the listings-along with appropri-
ate part numbers-if the factory estimates that the part will be required as
a standard service item. When listed, these items may also be ordered;
otherwise, re-use the hardware that was removed with the old part when
installing the new item.
8-31
Table 8-9 Keyprocessor Electronics- K0, Replaceable Parts

ID Description Part Number Comments
K0 Keyprocessor Electronics (see Figure 8-8 )
K0-1 Control Panel Casting 77921-20022 Glacier Grey
Name Plate 77921-80572 SONOS 2000

Name Plate 77921-80571 SONOS 2500
T-Panel Label Set 77921-80210 See LANGUAGE options Table 8-7.
K0-2 Qwerty Keyboard/Buttons 77921-62300 English.

See LANGUAGE options Table 8-7.
K0-3 Qwerty Keyboard Membrane 77921-40530
K0-4 Qwerty Keyboard Spacer 77921-20170
K0-5 Qwerty PCB 77921-61300 Screw (14), 0515-2392,

Screw (13) 77921-22430,
Screw (4) 0515-0430.
K0-6 Qwerty LED Daughterboard 77921-61700 Standoff (4) 0380-1887.

Screw (4) 0515-0430.
LED 1990-1682.
K0-7 Function Keyboard/Buttons 77921-62350 English.

K0-8 Function Keyboard Membrane 77921-40540
K0-9 Function Keyboard Spacer 77921-20180
K0-10 Function PCB 77921-61400 Screw (9), 77921-22430.
K0-11 Function LED Daughterboard 77921-61800 Screw (4) 0515-0430

LED 1990-1682
* SONOS 2000 Nameplate 77921-80572
* SONOS 2500 Nameplate 77921-80571
K0-12 Trackball Bracket 77921-00510 Screw (4) 0515-2245.
K0-13 Trackball 0950-1759 Cable 77120-65660.

Screw (3), 3030-0494, (1/16 Allen®).
8-32
Table 8-9 Keyprocessor Electronics- K0, Replaceable Parts (Continued)

K0-14 Microphone Bezel 77921-42382 Cable 77921-64130.

Mic LED 1990-0487
Mic Label,
Volume Label,
K0-15 Knob-small round 77921-40323 (10) below touch screen panel.
K0-16 Knob-large round 77921-40443 ( 3) Gain, Focus, Depth Labels.

K0-17 Knob-slide pot 77921-40332 (18) LGC & TGC, Volume.

[TGC LED AY4553K]
K0-18 Light Pipe (for Gain, Focus, Depth knobs) 77921-40230 4 each (plug-in beneath knob
labels)
K0-19 EL Panel Rear Shield (Grid) 77921-02060 1 per panel.

Screw (8) 0515-2145.
Screw (1) 0515-1194.
K0-20 EL Panel PCB 77921-65008 1 per Panel.

Screw (4) 0515-2245.
K0-21 EL Panel Vertical Mount Bracket 77921-22370 2 per Panel.

Screw (2) 0515-0664.
K0-22 EL Panel Horizontal Stiffener 77921-22340 2 per Panel.

Screw (2) 0515-0664.
K0-23 EL Panel (Touch Screen) 77921-80030 1 per Panel.
K0-24 Storage Caddy Assembly 77921-42440 Includes Caution Label 77921-84240

& Regulatory Label 77921-87230
* Variable Resistor 2100-4322 LGC & Volume
* Variable Resistor 2100-4323 TGC
* Rotary Variable Pot 0960-0760 For Soft & Hard Keys
K0-25 Mylar spacer 77921-80460
* Not Shown
- Notes -
8-33
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-34
Figure 8-8
Keyprocessor Electronics-K0
Exploded View Diagram
8-35
8-36
Table 8-10 E-Box Assembly-E0, Replaceable Parts

E0 E-Box Assembly (see Figure 8-9 )
E0-1 Cable Hanger (hooks) 77921-40502 One color-Glacier Grey.

Screw (2) 0515-0441.
E0-2 Bucket, Glacier Grey 77921-42372 Screw (6) 2360-0115.

Bucket, Tahitian Teal 77921-42374
E0-3 E-Box Chassis 77100-62085
E0-4 Fan Assembly 77100-67501 Screw (2) 2360-0123.

Includes: Clip (2) 0590-1698.
Fan 3160-0571
Fan Control PCB 77100-67500 Screw (2) 2510-0193,
Washer (2) 3050-0239,
E0-5 E-Box Rear Panel 77100-62340 Screw (2) 2510-0045.
E0-6 DSR Cover Plate 77100-01730 Screw (2) 2200-0105.
E0-6 Internal DSR/SCSI Cable 77100-64450 Includes connector.
E0-7 AQ Cover Plate 77100-01920 Screw (2) 2200-0105.
E0-7 External AQ Cable 77921-64340 Internal AQ to rear panel cable

77100-64530.
E0-8 BE Power Cable Assy 77100-64500 Connected to BE Motherboard.
E0-9 Rear FE Access Panel 77100-00730 Includes 77100-64210

internal cable/connector.
Screw (2) 2360-0115.
E0-10 FE Power Cable Assembly 77100-64210 Connected to FE Motherboard.
E0-11 Rear I/O PCB 77100-62740
E0-12 Rear I/O Panel 77100-02100 Screw, long 2360-0121.

Screw, bottom (3) 2360-0113.
Screw, top (2) 2360-0115.
Screw, sides (3) 2360-0117.
8-37
Table 8-10 E-Box Assembly-E0, Replaceable Parts(Continued)

E0-13 Transistor Plate Assembly 77100-62250 Transistor/fan cable 77100-64510,
Includes: Screw (2) 2360-0113.
FET (1) 1855-0775
Transistor (2) 1853-0524
Insulator (3) 1200-0077
Transistor Covers (3) 0340-0833
Thermal Pad (3) 0340-1170
E0-14 Thermal Switch 3103-0153 Cable 77100-64330,

screw (4) 2360-0111
E0-15 E-Box Cover 77100-02060 Screw (7) 2510-0043.

Label 77100-80150.
E0-16 E-Box Spacebar 77100-22100 Screw (4) 0515-1023.
E0-17 E-Box Rear Brackets 77100-01940 Screw (2) 2360-0121 (E-Box)

Screw (4) 0515-0386 (Rail)
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-38
Figure 8-9
E-Box Assembly-E0
8-39
8-40
Table 8-11 E-Box Front distribution Panel-E1, Replaceable Parts

E1 E-Box Front Distribution Panel Assembly (see Figure 8-10)
E1-1 Bail Assembly 77100-66155 Screw (5) 2510-0053.

RFI fingers (4) 77100-82310
(short, top & bottom).
E1-2 Doppler Detector Cable (CW Connector) 77100-64520 Core shield bead 9170-1521.
Tie wraps (3) 1400-0249.
E1-3 Distribution PCB Housing 77100-62470 Screw (8) 2360-0113.

RFI finger (4) 77100-01480
(side/vertical)
RFI finger (1) 77100-82090
(long, internal).
E1-4 Top Cover, Distribution PCB Housing 77100-01790 Screws (9) 2360-0192.
Caution label 77100-80010.
E1-5 Distribution PCB 77100-60250 Exchange P/N 77100-60258
E1-6 Filter Frame 77100-01800 (1 per side).

Screw (4) 2360- 0115.
E1-7 Filter Spacer 77100-01810 (1 per side).
E1-8 Filter 77100-01860 (1 per side).
E1-9 Filter Holder, Right (FE) 77100-01852 Handle 0370-3226,

screw 2360-0113.
E1-10 Filter Holder, Left (BE) 77100-01822 Handle 0370-3226,

screw 2360-0113.
E1-11 Front Panel 77100-62410 Screw (4) flat, 2510- 0121.

Screw (4) bottom, 2510-0045.
Screw (3) middle, 2360-0194.
8-41
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-42
Figure 8-10
E-Box Front Distribution Board Assembly-E1

8-43
8-44
Table 8-12 Cart Top Assembly Front View-T0, Replaceable Parts

T0 Cart Top Assembly, Front View (see Figure 8- 11 )
T0-1 Physio Front Panel Screw (4) 0515-1102.

for Options L01-L05 (ECG Only) 77921-00750 English.
for Options L10-L15 (ECG Extended) 77921-00740 English.
See Board Listing and Exchange No.s
in Table 8-5 for Physio PCB p/n.
T0-2 Physio Bottom Bracket 77921-00480
T0-3 Latch 77921-22040 Screws 0515-2043
T0-4 Arm for Gas Spring 77921-00240 Also see cart body assembly
front view, Table 8-15.
T0-5 Front Panel see comments p/n dependent on peripheral options.

Refer to OEM installation information.
T0-6 Cart Top Base 77921-20012 Glacier Grey
T0-7,8 Combo Spill Plate/Cover 77921-02220
T0-9 Top Cover 77921-20032 Rear panel screws (2), 77921-22422.
T0-10 Stop Bar, Twivel 77921-00810
T0-11 Liner Bearing, Twivel 77921-40240 Plastic insert
T0-12 Retainer Ring, Twivel 77921-00820
T0-13 Twivel Pad Base Assy 77921-87482
T0-14 Cable Strain Relief 77921-40172 Screw 0515-2392.

Cable clamp (large) 1400-0018.
Cable clamp (small) 1400-0017.
T0-15 Washer, Twivel 77921-22310
T0-16 Spring Clamp 0360-1362
T0-17 Tension Spring 1460-2386
T0-18 Transducer Holder-Linear Array 77921-40420
8-45
Table 8-12 Cart Top Assembly Front View-T0, Replaceable Parts(Continued)

T0-19 Transducer Holder-Trapezoidal Linear Array 77921-40410
T0-20 Transducer Holder-Sector/CLA 77921-40360
T0-21 Transducer Holder Support Rack 77921-01190 Screw 0515-1269.
T0-22 CW Holder 77921-42392 Screw 77921-22422.
T0-23 Service Support Arm/Bracket Assy 77921-67400 Screw (6) 0515-0380.
T0-24 12V Filter PCB 77921-60240
T0-25 Thermal Plug Grommet 77921-80520 Foam-like material.
T0-26 Keyprocessor Electronics Hinge/Mntg 77921-87470 Screw (4) 0515-2043.

Bracket Assembly
T0-27 1/4 Turn Screw 1390-1018 2 (old style)

1390-1036 2 (new style)
0510-1636 screw keeper
* Latch Kit 77921-87475
TO-28 Color Monitor: 77921-68000
TO-29 Bezel, glacier gray 77921-40212
TO-30 Housing, glacier gray 77921-40222
TO-31 Knob, brightness ctl. 77921-40182
TO-33 Bezel Clip 77921-00560
TO-34 Base 77921-40202

RGB Monitor Cable 77921-64010 Not Shown
Power cord 8120-4456 (power cord clamp 77000-05700)
Label, rear 77921-00372 (monitor with Toshiba tubes)
* Universal VCR mounting hardware M2406-61000
* Label, rear 77921-80382 (monitors with Hitachi tubes)
TO-35 15 Color Monitor 2090-0542 exchange part #: M2409-68000 moni-

tor assembly includes all parts listed
below
TO-36 Bezel, glacier gray 77921-42602
8-46
Table 8-12 Cart Top Assembly Front View-T0, Replaceable Parts(Continued)

TO-37 Housing, glacier gray 77921-72612
TO-38 Knobs (brightness/contrast) 77921-40182
TO-39 Bezel shock mounts (4) 77921-22440
TO-40 Housing screws (4) 0515-2876
TO-41 Locknuts (4) 77921-22460
* Housing rear label 77921-80392
*Not Shown
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-47
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-48
Figure 8-11
Cart Top Assembly Front View-T0
8-49
8-50
Table 8-13 Cart Top assembly Rear View-T1, Replaceable Parts

T1 Cart Top Assembly, Rear View (see Figure 8-12)
T1-1 Retainer Ring, Hinge 0510-0596 2 per hinge.
T1-2 Brass Bearing, Hinge 1410-1336
T1-3 Hinge Pin 77921-22060
T1-4 Rear Handle, Cart Top 77921-64502 Screw (4) 77921-22422.
T1-5 Rear Screw, Top Cover 77921-22422
T1-6 System I/O Panel, Standard, Assembly 77921-01440* May require LAN connector (1)
1252-6178.
*English. See LANGUAGE options
Table 8-7.
BNC Coax adapter (7) 1250-0583.
Print BNC right angle (1) 1250-
0076.
T1-7 System I/O PCB, Standard 77921-60400
T1-8 System I/O Panel with AQ Dataport 77921-01450* May require LAN connector (1)
1252-6178.
May require AQ dataport PCB (see
item T1-9 for details).
*English. See LANGUAGE options
Table 8-7.
BNC Coax adapter (7) 1250-0583.
Print BNC right angle (1) 1250-
0076.
T1-9 AQ Dataport PCB 77100-66590 Shield 77921-80700.
T1-10 Cart Top Base 77921-20012 Glacier Grey
- Notes -
8-51
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-52
Figure 8-12
Cart Top Assembly Rear View-T1
8-53
8-54
Table 8-14 Cart Base Assembly-Co, Replaceable Parts

C0 Car t Assembly, Base (see Figure 8-13)
C0-1 Brake Assembly, Left 77921-62551 Also see Figure 8-16.
C0-2 Brake Assembly, Right 77921-62552 Also see Figure 8-16.
C0-3 Suspension Bumper, Front Wheel 77921-80510 2 required, 1 left and 1 right. Screws (4)
0515-2464.
C0-4 Suspension Bearing, Axel 1410-1394 (4 ea.)-Brass

Also see Figure 8-16.
C0-5 Suspension Collar, Axel 1500-1006 (2 ea.)

Also see Figure 8-16.
C0-6 Power Supply Rear Panel Bumper p/o cart base. Accepts guide pin from
power supply rear panel.
Grommet, 0400-0378.
Use loctite, 0470-1050.
C0-7 Cart Base Casting 77921-62540 Includes filter holder guide shown
exploded out of base assembly.
* Wheel Cable Protector, Right side 77921-62562 Rubber, mounted in front of brake assy.
* Wheel Cable Protector, Left side 77921-62561 Rubber, mounted in front of brake assy.
* Not shown
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-55
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-56
Figure 8-13
Cart Base Assembly-C0
8-57
8-58
Table 8-15 Cart Body Assembly Front View-C1, Replaceable Parts

C1 Cart Body Assembly, Front View (see Figure 8- 14 )
C1-1 Side Panel, Left 77921-40012 Glacier Grey (clips 0361-1603)
C1-2 Side Panel, Left 77921-40014 Tahitian Teal
C1-3 Pocket Insert, Left 77921-40472 Glacier Grey
C1-4 Pocket Insert, Left 77921-40474 Tahitian Teal
C1-5 Side Panel, Right 77921-40022 Glacier Grey
C1-6 Side Panel, Right 77921-40024 Tahitian Teal
C1-7 Pocket Insert, Right 77921-40482 Glacier Grey
C1-8 Pocket Insert, Right 77921-40484 Tahitian Teal
C1-9 Rear Door 77921-62272 Glacier Grey
C1-10 Rear Door 77921-62274 Tahitian Teal
C1-11 Corner Post, Left Front 77921-00210 Screw (4) 0515-0442.
C1-12 Corner Post, Left Rear 77921-00200 Screw (4) 0515-0442
C1-13 Corner Post, Right Front 77921-01170 Screw (4) 0515-0442.
C1-14 Corner Post, Right Rear 77921-00650 Screw (4) 0515-0442
C1-15 Slide Guide Rail (2) Left and Right 77801-00100 For use with printer OEMs.
See peripheral options. Refer to
OEM installation information.
C1-16 Slide Rail (2) Left and Right 77920-02950 For use with 77450A (DSR), OEM, or
77510A KOWA thermal recorder.
See peripheral options. Refer to
OEM installation information.
C1-17 Slide Rail (2) Left and Right 77920-02900 For E-Box. Screw (4) 0515-0386.
C1-18 Rail, Top Left 77921-00220 Screw (1) 0515-0441.

Screw (4) 0515-0442.

8-59
Table 8-15 Cart Body Assembly Front View-C1, Replaceable Parts(Continued)

C1-19 Rail, Top Right 77921-00221 Screw (1) 0515-0441.
Screw (4) 0515-0442.
C1-20 Rail, Top Rear (Hinge) 77921-20042 Glacier Grey

Screw (6) 0515-0442.
C1-21 Gas Shock 1520-0777 Includes ball stud which fastens to

left and right rear corner posts-use
lock washer 2190-0025. Press ball
of shock onto ball stud and secure
with supplied spring lock.
C1-22 Arm 77921-00240 Thread bottom of arm onto top of

gas shock. Fasten top of arm to
cart top assy using gas spring
screw 77921-22110.
C1-23 Cable, Circuit Breaker 77921-64210 Grommet (6) 0400-0112.
C1-24 Bracket, Circuit Breaker 77921-00452 Screw (4) 0515-0380.
C1-25 Circuit Breaker, 20 Ampere, 3105-0258 100/120V.

100/120V Used with option Z01 or Z02.
Screw (2) 0515-0430.
C1-26 Circuit Breaker, 10 Ampere, 3105-0302 220/230/240V .

220/230/240V Used with option Z04, Z05, Z06.
Screw (2) 0515-0430.
C1-27 Speaker Box, Left & Right 77921-62292 Does not include speaker
Screw (4) 0515-0442.
Clamp (4) 1400-1675.
Internal Cable 77921-64030
Speaker 9164-0222
C1-28 Power Transformer 77921-60010 Screw (2), 0515-2466.

Washer (2), 3050-0209
Insulator, 77921-80411.
C1-29 Footrest Cover Plate 77921-40253 Screw (3) 0515-0386.
C1-30 Foam pad 77921-80600 Behind front footrest panel.
8-60
Table 8-15 Cart Body Assembly Front View-C1, Replaceable Parts(Continued)

C1-31 Front Footrest Panel 77921-62530 In front of power supply.
C1-32 Power Supply Assembly 77101-81030 Exchange p/n 77101-68100.

Foam pad, 77921-80600.
C1-33 Filter, Power Supply 77921-80500 Velcro strip (10) 77100-00950.
C1-34 Filter Holder, Power Supply 77921-01880
C1-35 Brake Foot Bar 77921-62260 Also see Figure 8-16.
C1-36 Rivot Clip 0361-1603
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-61
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-62
Figure 8-14
Cart Body Assembly Front View-C1
8-63
8-64
Table 8-16 Cart Body Assembly Rear View-C2, Replaceable Parts

C2 Cart Assembly, Rear View (see Figure 8-15)
C2-1 Rail, Top Rear (Hinge) 77921-20042 Glacier Grey.

Screw (6) 0515-0442.
C2-2 Brass Bearing, Hinge 1410-1336
C2-3 Hinge Pin 77921-22060 E-ring pin retainer (4) 0510-0596.
C2-4 Safety Ground Wire 77921-64330 Grounds cart chassis to cart top.
Screw 0515-0380.
C2-5 Corner Post, Left Rear 77921-00200 Screw (4) 0515-0442.
C2-6 Corner Post, Right Rear 77921-00650 Screw (4) 0515-0442
C2-7 Extender Power Strip (220/230/240V) 1252-5497 Use only with options Z04, Z05, Z06.
Fuse (4A/250V) 2110-0734.
Cable bracket 77921-02150.
C2-8 IEC Bracket (220/230/240V) 77921-00970 Use only with options Z04, Z05, Z06.
Locknut (2) 0535-0135.
C2-9 IEC Power Cord (220/230/240V) 77921-64320 Used only with options Z04, 05, 06.
Cable clip (2) 1400-1356.
C2-10 Terminal Box 77921-00410 Screw (4) 0515-0386..

Ground lug 1252-5964.
Washer 2190-0067.
Tie Wrap 1400-0399
C2-11 Terminal Strip 0360-2567 Screw (2) 0515-2245.
C2-12 Line Filter 77921-64260 Screw 0515-1656.

Washer 2190-0763.
Insulator 77410-00511.
C2-13 Ground Filter 77920-62270 Screw 0515-1656.

Washer 2190-0763.
Insulator 77410-00511.
Ground screw 0515-0380.
8-65
Table 8-16 Cart Body Assembly Rear View-C2, Replaceable Parts(Continued)

C2-14 Rear Wheel Caster Assembly 77921-64480 Includes balloon tire 77921-87450.
Secure caster to cart with bolt
0515-2466 and washer 3050-0209 (4
ea. per caster).
Wheel Kit 77921-62570
C2-15 Power Strip, Isolated, 1252-5517 Standard on all Systems.

Locknut (2) 0535-0135,
Grommet (2) 0400-0112.
Cable bracket 77921-02140.
C2-16 Rail, Top Right 77921-00221 Screw (1) 0515-0441.

Screw (4) 0515-0442.
C2-17 Rail, Top Left 77921-00220 Screw (1) 0515-0441.

Screw (4) 0515-0442.
C2-18 Rubber Bumper (2 ea.) 0403-0792 Rubber washer (2) 3050-1554.
C2-19 Latch Pin 77921-22050 Lock nut (2) 0535-0101
C2-20 Washer 3050-1682 Place above and below rubber

grommet.
C2-21 Rubber Grommet 0400-0378
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-66
Figure 8-15
Cart Body Assembly Rear View-C2
8-67
8-68
Table 8-17 Front Wheel & Brake Assembly-W0, Replaceable Parts

W0 Front Wheel & Brake Assemblies-Left/Right (see Figure 8- 16 )
W0-1 Screw 0515-2464
W0-2 Retainer Ring 77921-22120
W0-3 Hub Cap 77921-00880
W0-4 Balloon Tire/Wheel 77921-87450 Front and Rear. SONOS 1000s

wheel kit, P/N 77921-62570 will also
work.
W0-5 Washer 3050-1556 Curved-shape washers.
W0-6 Brake Assembly, Left 77921-62551 Also see Figure 8- 13.
W0-7 Brake Assembly, Right 77921-62552 Also see Figure 8-13.
W0-8 Bearing, Axel 1410-1394 Also see Figure 8-13.
W0-9 Collar, Axel 1500-1006 Also see Figure 8-13.
W0-10 Brake Foot Bar 77921-62260
W0-11 Brake Lever Cap 77921-22230
W0-12 Hex Head Screw 0515-2465
W0-13 Lock Washer 2190-0740 Not on all systems
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-69
- Notes -
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
8-70
Figure 8-16
Front Wheel & Brake Assembly-W0
8-71
8-72
CAP COVER TOP MOUNTING SCREW
171G076-OLD (Not shown) 057T891-OLD
SMALL POSITIONING KNOB

057T892-OLD
SET SCREW
99-6400-324
(ORDER SEPARATELY)
CLICK RING
057T893-OLD
057T894-OLD
RETAINER RINGS
057T895-OLD
LARGE POSITIONING KNOB

057T896-OLD
06-5626-ACM
CLICK RING (FRONT)

057T897-OLD
FRONT
STRAIN RELIEF
MOLDED COVER
87-5037-3ACM
057T898-OLD (FRONT)
057T899-OLD (REAR)
COVER SCREWS
TEE SUITCASE
4X PAN HD. 057T900-OLD
o 91-5044-12ACM
2X 100 -FLAT 057T901-OLD
5gjl018
Figure 8-17
Model 21363A TEE Transducer Replacement Parts
8-73
T-CROSS
WHITE PLASTIC STOP CONN. BODY

HEAT SHRINK PART OF 1252-0622
ON CABLE 6 in. CLEAR HEAT SHRINK 0890-1125
0890-1250
PIN 1
1/4 in.
NUT
STRAIN RELIEF SLEEVE SHRINK TUBING 8 PIN
CABLE
ABOVE ITEMS ALL PART 0890-0871 CONN.
OF CONN. 1252-0622 (2 PLACES) 1252-0622
HEAT SHRINK PAPER LABEL

"CAUTION" LABEL 9320-4340
SEE NOTE LABELED AS FOLLOWS:
SN XXXXAYYYYY WHERE
XXXX = PREFIX DATA CODE
YYYYY = SERIAL NUMBER
MALE CONNECTOR
FEMALE CONNECTOR 8 PIN CONNECTOR
WHITE GREEN-SHIELD SIDE VIEW
RED 4
2 3
1 4 P.N.
21.5kΩ 0698-7268
8 5
7 6
BLACK 5
1252-0622
MALE CONNECTOR
WHITE GREEN-SHIELD FEMALE CONNECTOR
21221A (WHITE PROBE) NOTE:
FRONT VIEW CONNECTOR IS A COMPLETE
ASSEMBLY WITH AN ATTACHED
2 3
NOTE: 1 4 CABLE AND ADDITIONAL END
FOR 21223A 5 MHZ PROBE RESISTOR 8 5 CONNECTOR. TO REPLACE,
PART NUMBER IS 0698-7260 (10 kΩ) 76 REMOVE CART BUCKET AND BUCKET
FOR 21228A 1.9 MHz PROBE RESISTOR LINER. UNSCREW CONNECTOR
PART NUMBER IS 0698-7243 (1.96 kΩ) AND DISCONNECT SECOND
SEE NOTE CONNECTOR FROM MOTHERBOARD.
FRONT VIEW
CW CONNECTOR
(ON DISTRIBUTION HOUSING)
77100-64410:
CW RECEPTACLE CABLE FOR REVISION N.3.2 AND BELOW
77100-64520:
DOPPLER DETECTOR CABLE FOR REVISION O.0 AND ABOVE
5ajl007
Figure 8-18
Model 2122XA Probe Wiring
8-74
A Theory of Operation
Introduction
This Appendix is dedicated to give the reader a basic understanding of

system architecture.
For convenience and clarity, the system is divided into two main sections
which are:
1 The Keyscanner Control Electronics.
Includes: All keyboard controls, Electroluminescent displays
and Touch panels, Physios, Audio and I/O interface.
2 The Main E-Box Electronics.
Includes: Transducer Interface, Scanner, Scan Converter and

I/O interface.
The RGB color monitor as well as the main power supply are serviced
by exchange; therefore, they are not covered in detail.
Troubleshooting information for both of these components is
available in Chapter 3.
Power distribution information may be found in the wiring and
cabling Chapter 7.
A block diagram of the overall system is located at the end of the

NOTE chapter 3 so that it may be used as a general troubleshooting tool.
A-1
March 21, 1997 10:21 am DRAFT
Figure A-1
SCANNER MUX
HIGH
DOPPLER DOPPLER I/Q ANALOG
L VOLTAGE TGC
SUPPLY
DETECTOR COLOR FLOW
TRANSDUCER
R
FRONT DELAYS IMAGE 2D/M-MODE ANALOG
END (FOCUS) DETECTOR
COLOR
SCANNER R IMAGE
AQ
IF I/O
FLOW
THETA MEMORY
2D DSR
COLOR
M-MODE MODE
SCAN M-MODE
DOP PROC. VIDEO
CONVERTER
FFT
SPECTRUM SPECTRUM
GRAPHICS I/O
PHYSIOS
AUDIO PHYSIOS
RS232 RGB
REAR I/O
CONTROL FUNCTION
TRACKBALL
CONTROL RS232 PHYSIO

VOICE DC POWER RGB
MAIN SPKR
R-EL TOUCH I/O SPKR MONITOR
DATA CONTROL + AUDIO

PORT
L-EL TOUCH SYSTEM I/O FOOTSWITCH VCR
EXT AUDIO
Keyboard Control PHYSIO PHYSIO I/O HEADPHONES

300e024
First Level Block Diagram

Theory of Operation
Section 1 - Keyscanner Control Electronics
Control electronics is a broad term meant to encompass the circuitry and

all system boards housed in the upper section of the cart. A significant
challenge in regards to system design is the opportunity to include state of
the art system controls. These design considerations do, in a significant
manner, improve the ease of operation and user interface in both the
operational and service or test modes.
Referring to the first level block diagram in Figure 1, please note that the
control section is divided into two distinct areas:
❏ The area referred to as Keyboard Control is surrounded by a dotted
line. It includes the function and standard keyboard, right and left EL
displays with touchpanels and trackball.
The Standard Computer keyboard is refered to as a QWERTY
keyboard and is integrated to a QWERTY PC board.
❏ The area referred to as Keyscanner / audio, Physio and I/O

complete the control electronics and include the system level interface
or I/O that separates the control electronics from the main E-Box (Main
Electronics Box that is at the heart of the Imaging System, includes
Scanner and Scan Converter).
Keyboard Control
The User Interface is made up of the listed primary components which are
housed in an aluminum frame located at the top of the system, directly facing
the operator.
❏ 2 Electroluminescent (EL) displays and resistive Touch Screens.
❏ 2 Main PCB's (Function and QWERTY).
❏ 2 Daughterboards. (Plug into Function and QWERTY boards).
❏ Trackball.
A-3
Theory of Operation
❏ Microphone and LED status indicator.
All of these components interface directly to the Keyscanner board which

constantly scans the Interface for user input.
Two EL panels are used to display soft keys which change depending on the
application selected. Resistive touch screens overlay the EL panels to allow
selection of a function in a particular illuminated area on the EL.
The touch screen consists of two transparent sheets with a transparent
conductive coating on the sides facing each other. There is a grid of miniature
separator dots between the two sheets to keep them from touching
without external stimulus. Finger pressure causes the outer sheet to contact
the inner sheet at the position of touch. The connector tail is delicate and
should not be bent with a radius smaller than 1/4 inch.
In addition to the boards which make up the Control panel
Interface, 5 additional boards complete the control and Physio
hardware.
They are:
❏ Keyscanner/audio board.
❏ Physio board.
❏ Physio I/O board.
❏ Main I/O board.
❏ System I/O board.
A-4
Theory of Operation
The block diagram shows how these boards are interconnected.
Figure A-2
TO CONTROL PANEL EL POWER

FILTER
KEYSCANNER
MAIN I/O BD SYSTEM I/O BD
AUDIO BD
TO OTHER
PHYSIO BD SYSTEM
DEVICES
PHYSIO I/O BD
300e021
Control Hardware Block Diagram
The Keyscanner and Main I/O boards are mounted flat in the bottom of
the control head. They are connected together via a 165 pin three row
connector interface.
The Physio I/O and Physio boards are connected together and reside in
the front compartment of the control head. The Physio board connects to the
Keyscanner through a single 60 pin interface cable. The Physio I/O board
provides the connection to the outside world for all Physios. All input
connectors, including the ECG input connector, are PC mount type
eliminating the need for hand wiring. A 10 pin ribbon connector and a 4 pin
shielded Molex connector send input signals from the Physio I/O board to the
Physio board.
A second 10 pin ribbon cable brings audio to the headphones port on the
Physio I/O board. The audio originates on the keyscanner board.
A-5
Theory of Operation
The system I/O board is located at the rear of the system, mounted to the
System I/O panel, and interfaces to the Main I/O board. Several auxiliary
signals for connection to remote devices are provided through this board.
These include external audio/video output connectors and a footswitch
interface.
Keyscanner Board K1
The main function of the keyscanner hardware is to read inputs from the
control panel or alternative control source such as audio inputs or
peripherals and send the commands to the E-Box via RS232C.
A four digit LED display is provided for error codes. The display is self
scanned independent of the on board processor. This allows the last error
code to remain visible in the event of a software crash.
The following distinct functions are performed on this board:
1 Video control to the EL panels.
2 VCR interface.
3 Input conditioning for rotary encoders.
4 Scanning of front panel keys.
5 Decoding of LED drivers.
6 Audio Processing.
A-6
Theory of Operation
Physio Board K2
The functions of this board are as follows:

1 Detection of an ECG waveform through three electrodes and processing
to obtain three waveforms (Sector ECG, Doppler/Mmode ECG, and an R
wave pulse). Signals are routed to the PVT board (C5) in the E-box.
2 Detection of a Respiration waveform through the RA/LA ECG electrodes
and processing to obtain a waveform for the E-box PVT board.
3 Heartsound Amplification and Filtering from a Heartsound Transducer to
obtain an audio output and a waveform to the E-box PVT board.
4 Pulse Waveform processing from a pulse transducer to obtain a wave-
form for the E-box PVT board.
ECG
ECG patient signals are derived from three leads: RA (right arm), LA (left
arm) and RL (right leg drive). These leads are housed in a shielded cable
whose shield is at a Floating ground potential. From the patient cable, signals
are processed through high voltage protection circuitry which resides on the
Physio I/O board. This board contains current limiting carbon resistors and
voltage limiting neon lamps to discharge differential static or common mode
ESD or Defibrillation events. It also contains an 800 volt Spark Gap device
between the Floating Ground and Instrument Ground.
Respiration Waveform
The principle of respiration measurement is as follows:

A carrier signal of known frequency is applied across the patient via the RA
and LA ECG electrodes. Breathing changes the effective impedance across
the thorax which causes the carrier to be modulated creating a signal made
up of a large static component and a very small dynamic component which
reflects the respiration. This small signal is coupled via a optoisolator,
amplified and filtered to a final bandwidth of 8Hz.
A-7
Theory of Operation
Heartsound
The Heartsound signal processor amplifies and filters heartsound signals in

the range of 25 to 1800 Hz, received from the Heartsound Microphone.
It consists of a low noise high gain input amplifier. The output is ac coupled
to remove the offset created by the input amplifier. It is then low pass filtered
by two second order stages which create a cutoff at 2 kHz. with 24dB/octave
rolloff.
Pulse
The Pulse signal processor amplifies and filters Pulsation signals in the range
of 0.15 to 150 Hz, received from the Pulse Microphone.
It consists of a simple high gain non-inverting amplifier input stage which ac
couples (corner frequency = 0.5 Hz) into a unity gain buffer amplifier and
filter (corner frequency of 100 Hz.). It is then followed by two gain stages.
Physio I/O Board K3
The Physio I/O board contains the input connectors which the physio
transducers (or auxiliary inputs) are connected to. It also contains the ECG
input connector, ECG High Voltage protection circuitry and the headphone
port. All connectors are PC mounted and grounded to the chassis. The
headphones are connected via resistors to match the drive level to speakers.
Contacts in the headphone jack disconnect the cart speakers when the
headphones are plugged in.
Please note that two different versions of this board exist depending on the
physio options installed:
1 FULLY LOADED (Heart-sounds, Respiration, Pulse & ECG).
2 ECG & AUX input jacks only.
A-8
Theory of Operation
Physio Control
The setup menu allows the user to select which Physio inputs appear on the
primary display. In addition, it provides access to controls which vary the
position and gain of each channel, invert a waveform and control the
application of an internal test signal.
Main I/O Board K5
This board performs the task of interfacing the Keyscanner/audio and Physio
boards to the many functional components of the system; to the E-Box via
RS232, the VCR via a 34 pin parallel or RS232 interface, to the speakers, dc
power supply, various signals to/from the system I/O board, stereo audio to/
from the VCR, audio/Physio signals to/from the E-Box, and two spare serial
ports for future use.
System I/O Board K4
This board contains hardware responsible for interfacing to the outside

world. It also provides an external ECG/Rwave output for external devices,
spare audio, footswitch and RS232 port. RFI filtering as well as ESD
(electrostatic) protection has been incorporated in the design of the circuitry.
A-9
Theory of Operation
Section 2 - E-Box Electronics
Scanner
Digital Control (DC) B14
The Digital Control board (DC) contains the main proces sor for operating the
Scanner section of the 77100B Imager. The processor communicates w ith the
Processor Graphics (PG) board in the Scan Converter via a serial
communication bus carried on the digital ribbon cable which comes into the
Scanner I/O board.
The processor sends line type information to the Scanner I/O and performs
frame handshaking w ith the Scan Converter. Frame handshaking refers to
status signals which pass between the DC and R-Theta boards to synchronize
the transfer of image data from the Scanner to the Scan Converter. These
signal are routed over the digital ribbon cable, along with the serial
communications bus.
Below is a short description of the four main data transfer busses .
68020 bus - Links the processor to the TGC, Fine Delay, Transmit Power
Supply, Image Detector and Doppler Detector boards.
Line Timer bus - The Line Timer generates all timing signals required to fire
a l ine: when to re-focus, when to change TGC zones and when to sample
Doppler.
Frame Table bus - The Frame Table defines the type of l ine to be fired:
angle, line number, number of pulses, depth of focus and apodization.
Tap Coefficient bus - The Tap Coefficient descriptions tell the Coarse Delay
(CD) taps where to route each receive channel: CD board number and tap
number.
A -10

Theory of Operation
TGC B13
The TGC board performs two major functions:
1 Clock generation - Generates the 60MHz master clock from one of two
crystal oscillators (toggle s witch on board selects NTSC or PAL). All
other Scanner clocks are generated on the TGC using the 60MHz clock as
a reference.
2 TGC control - TGC sl ide pot positions are scanned by the key proces sor
and digital values are sent to the DC. The DC sends the values to the TGC
which stores them in RAM until a l ine is processed. At that point, the val-
ues are read out through a D/A converter. These analog signals are inte-
grated to form an Image via the Image Detector (ID) and Doppler
Detector (DD) boards.
Distribution B15
The Distribution board (DB) has no signal processing capabil ity. It acts as a
conduit through which transmit and receive s ignals pass between the system
and the transducer. Circuitry on the DB i s divided into two blocks:
1 Transducer selection - Two s ignals from the Transmit Power Supply
board are used to bias on the channel s for the selected transducer and
bias off the channel s for the deselected transducer.
2 EEPROM Interface - Transducer identification information i s transm it-
ted from the transducer connector through the DB so that the DC can
read the transducer information. EEPROM s ignals are opto-isolated to
avoid injecting digital noise into the received s ignal.
The DB also reads the transducer interlock m icroswitch. This signal is sent to
the DC where it controls an interrupt to set PV Power Supply sequencing for
linear array probes. The s ignal also alerts the system that a transducer has
been inserted or removed.
A -11

Theory of Operation
Front End B3-10
The FE performs two main functions:
1 Transmit drive for transducer - Transmitting drive for the transducer

elements i s generated on the FEs. A T TL-level pulse from the Fine Delay
boards (FD) triggers a FE T which s witches the transm it voltage (from the
Transm it Power Supply board) onto the transmit channels and out to the
transducer elements.
2 Received signal processing - The small reflected signal returns from

the transducer and each channel i s buffered, amplified, and filtered on
the FE boards. There are different bandpass filters for each transducer
frequency.
Fine Delay B1,2,11,12
Each Fine Delay board (FD) contains 32 channel s. The FD performs four
major functions:
1 Transmitter pulse - Generates TTL-level timing pulses to fire the trans-

ducer drivers on the FE s. The FD calculates the correct delays for the
drivers on each channel. These delays provide the phasing of the trans-
ducer elements for steering and focusing.
2 TGC gain (front) - Received signal is amplified or attenuated according

to the TGC control s ignals generated by the TGC board.
3 Fine focusing - M ixes the received R F signal to an intermediate fre-

quency (IF) for ease of processing while correcting for phase shifts
between channels . A local oscil lator is generated on the FD based on
clocks from the TGC board.
4 Receive apodization - The received signal is amplified or attenuated

according to control s ignals generated by the TGC board.
A -12

Theory of Operation
Coarse Delays A2-7
Each Coarse Delay board (CD) contains a tap matrix and the delay lines. The
output of one CD i s the input to the next CD. The output of the last CD in the
chain is a summation of the s ignal contributions from all of the receive
channels .
Tap matrix - Each CD contains two analog sw itch matrix chips which can
connect any of the receive channel outputs from the FDs to each of the input
taps for the delay lines on that board. Tap coefficients from the DC programs
which channels wi ll be connected to each tap.
Delay lines - There are 16 daisy-chained delay l ines on each CD.
Image Detector A13-A11
The Image Detector board(s) (ID) processes all black and white 2D and M -
mode data. Doppler and color flow signals pass through the ID without being
processed and on to the Doppler Detector board (DD). These s ignals return
to the ID after process ing and are routed onto the analog ribbon cable along
with the 2D and M-mode signals .
The ID also contains the temperature sense circuit for controll ing the
Scanner fan and reads back res ident test s ignals and T EE thermi stor
temperature to the DC via an A/D converter.
A -13

Theory of Operation
Doppler Detector A12
The Doppler Detector board (DD) extracts the Doppler shifted frequencies
from both the PW and CW Doppler and the color flow IF signal s. These
signals are sent to the Scan Converter via the ID and analog ribbon cable.
Processing of separate CW transducer s ignals is the same as sector
transducer signals except for the addition of a preamplifier stage.
Color flow s ignals are filtered to reduce R F noise, then amplified (rear TGC
stage). The color flow detection circuitry i s essentially the same as that used
for the Doppler s ignals.
Transmit Power Supply A8
The Transmit Power Supply board (XPS) performs the following functions:
1 Transmit supplies - Raw high voltage supplies from the main power
supply module are selected. Voltages reaching this board are regulated by
series pass transi stors mounted on the E-Box chas si s, as derived from the
-90V raw supply and li mited to a Maximum of -75V.
2 Transducer selection - The XPS provides a bias voltage for each trans-
ducer connector. One voltage, -155V, reverse biases diode sw itches on the
DB for the deselected connector through to the FE channels . The second
voltage, +10V, forward biases s witches for the selected connector to dis-
connect those lines from the F E boards.
3 Front End Control - Switches on the X PS are used to bias on and off
diodes to select the appropriate bandpass filter on the F E boards. Control
s ignals originating in the Digital Control board are buffered to avoid digi-
tal noise reaching the front end.
4 TEE safety circuits - An op-amp and bridge circuit for the TEE probe
thermistor are used to monitor the temperature at the probe tip. The tem-
perature is read back to the Digital Control board via an A/D converter. In
addition to hardware safeguards, software shuts down transmit to the
probe if the threshold i s reached.
A -14

Theory of Operation
PV Power Supply A9
The PV Power Supply (PVPS) contains the digital logic needed to program
the active multiplexers in the l inear array transducers. A ROM-based
sequencer i s used to set each multiplexer so that the proper transducer
elements are connected to the receive channels for each l ine transmitted and
received. The analog portion of the PV PS provides bias voltages to the
transducer multiplexers. A hardware interlock between the PV PS and the
X PS al lows the X PS to test the PV voltages. DRL and DRR (left and right
transducer bias voltages) w il l be disabled and the transmitters wi ll not come
up if the PV supplies are out of regulation.
Scan Converter
Processor/Graphics C1
The Processor/Graphics board (PG) consists of a main processor section and
a graphics-generating section.
1 Processor - The PG board contains the main processor and its associ-
ated software for operating the Scan Converter. The processor reads and
writes information to all the other Scan Converter boards via the back-
plane proces sor bus. The processor is clocked by the 10MHz clock used
for the non-video portion of the Scan Converter.
2 Graphics - The graphics section contains eight graphics planes or bit

maps. The PG generates graphics information which is stored in RAM as a
s ingle bit for each screen pixel for each plane. A video system controller
chip controls the graphics dynamic memory and updates to the video bus.
Temperature sensing - The PG contains the temperature sense circuit for

controlling the Scan Converter fan.
Battery - The processor graphics board uses a non-charging, lithium battery

(3.6 V nominal). It supplies the battery-backed R AM and i s located in a socket
on this board.
A -15

Theory of Operation
Scanner I/O C14
The Scanner I/O (SIO) board is the back-end interface to the Scanner. It
digitizes the analog signal s from the Scanner and after some s imple
process ing and arranging of the data it distributes it to other Scan Converter
boards.
Functions are as follows:
2D- 2D s ignals are digitized by an A /D converter and applied to the com-

press ion ROMs for grayscale mapping. The data i s then sent to the R-Theta
board along with output tim ing signals . This board is capable of a paral lel
2D channel with gain compensation.
M-Mode - The M-mode s ignal i s sampled by the same A/D converter as 2D

and also passes through the same compress ion ROMs. A D/A converter then
converts the mapped data back to analog for preprocess ing. (The analog
preprocessed signal i s multiplexed with analog spectral data from the Dop-
pler Processor board to provide video for the stripchart recorder). Another
A /D, which follows the preprocess ing filters, converter generates digital M -
mode data which i s buffered to line up with any associated color flow data.
The data is then sent to the PVT Phys io/Video/Ti ming board.
Color flow - Two A/D converters, one for the I component and one for the
Q, digitize the color signal . Color data i s then buffered while one full color
packet is acquired; then, the flow data i s read out to the F low Processor
board.
Doppler Processor C13
The Doppler Processor board (DP) receives the Doppler I and Q s ignals
generated by the DD from the SIO.
There are two separate s ignal paths in the DP's analog section, audio and
spectral.
A -16

Theory of Operation
1 Audio path - The audio path contains wall filters, a lowpass noise filter,
and a rotational filter which develops the left and right audio channels .
2 Spectral path - The spectral path contains user selectable wall filters
and a low pass filter. Data from the spectral path is digitized and sent to
the digital signal processor (DSP). The PG downloads operating software
to RAM on the DP. This programs the DSP to perform F FT calculations on
the I and Q signals and thus produce Doppler spectral data. Spectral data
i s sent to the PV T. (Also, a D/A converter converts the spectrum to analog
form for routing to the stripchart PC B).
Flow Processor C11
The Flow Processor board (FP) receives digitized color flow I and Q data
from the SIO. One complete color packet i s read out to the FP. A control bit
indicates if the data is 2D or M -mode. Color data is filtered by the user
configurable s moothing filter. This high pas s filter i s set by the color process
selection and is used to reduce low velocity wall artifacts. Mean flow velocity
and turbulence calculations are then performed. F inally, the resulting
velocity data is spatially filtered according to the configuration setting
selected by the user.
DSR - SCSI C10
The SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) board adds the capabil ity for
storing and retrieving digital data to an optical disk media.
A -17

Theory of Operation
The following are the main circuit components of this board:
A 68000 is the local microprocessor, it performs all board controls with low
level, disk oriented commands received by way of the mailbox from the main
68020 located in the PG board.
The DMA backplane allows high speed memory transfer over the processor
data bus of the Scan Converter.
The Compres sion and expansion circuits i mplements an algorithm in the
image data. This reduces the amount of data required to store an image or
loop.
The industry standard, Small Computer System Interface or SCSI i s used as
the interface to the disk drive.
R-Theta C9
The R -Theta board (RT) scan converts 2D black-and-white and 2D color flow
data from sector or linear format to X- Y rectangular coordinates. These data
are written to X-Y addresses in the Image Memory (IM).
Acoustic Quantification C8
The AQ board is responsible for all the process ing as sociated with the HP
Acoustic Quantification technology. It interfaces primarily with the RT and
PV T boards. A microprocessor with associated memory performs the real
time calculations for the AQ function.
A -18

Theory of Operation
Image Memory C7
The Image Memory board (IM) holds the memory for sector and l inear
images , both black-and-white and color flow. This board i s also responsible
for the insertion of a grey scale bar as a means of calibration reference.
Stripchart Board C6
The primary function of the Stripchart recorder board i s to provide hard copy
of data from the Image Memory board as a Frame Dump output directly to a
video chart printer.
In addition, the board w ill process strip information on Doppler and M-Mode
signals as well as physiological signals. A D/A converter outputs the s ignals
directly to the strip chart recorder.
Physio/Video/Timing C5
The Physio/Video/Timing board (PVT) performs three main functions:
1 Video display- The video display system generates the sync and timing
s ignals for the monitor and for digital video sources such as the IM, PG,
B/W CLR, Color CLR, and the memory portion of the PV T itself. The PVT
distributes the video clock (real-time or playback) to the other Scan Con-
verter boards. This portion of the PV T i s controlled by the main processor
on the PG.
2 M-mode/spectral memory - This part of the PVT contains the memory
for M -mode and Doppler spectral data.
3 Physio memory - There i s a separate memory for physio and other

waveform data. Signals from the physio amplifier are filtered and digi-
tized by an A/D converter on the PV T. The physio memory acts as a graph-
ics overlay which can be configured on or off.
A -19

Theory of Operation
Video I/O C4
The Video I/O board (VIO) translates digital image data and graphics into
video signals . Data in memory on the IM, PV T, PG or CLR boards is read out
pixel-by-pixel onto the digital video buses and mapped to RGB s ignals. RGB
video is also converted to composite video and S-video for peripheral
devices. The VIO outputs drive the main video display, cameras and printers,
VCRs, auxiliary video outputs , and the CLR and IM boards in VCR playback.
A ll output s ignals are routed via the Imager's Rear I/O panel except playback
video to the CLR and IM boards which passes through the Scan Converter
motherboard
B/W Continuous Loop Review C2
The B/W Continuous Loop Review board (B/W CLR) contains the necessary
memory for this function. The two sources of grey level data are the system
black-and-white video bus and the black-and-white component of VCR
playback video from the VI/O. Video data is continuously routed through the
CLR boards so that it w il l be available as soon as a loop acquire is requested.
At Revision B.0, the B/W CLR board and the CCLR board were combined into
one board. The B/W function i s contained on the CCLR board.
Color Continuous Loop Review C3
The Color Continuous Loop Review board (C CLR) contains additional
memory. Data sources for this board include the system color video bus,
color components of the VCR playback signal, and black-and-white data from
the B /W CLR (during non-color modes). The CCLR operation i s very similar
to that of B/W CLR. Color VCR playback components are digitized on the C
CLR prior to storing in memory.
* At revis ion B.0 the name of this board changed to combined
continuous loop review.
A -20

Index
Numerics Command Buttons , 4-10 Flash Card Connectors , 8-23
2D , , 1-5, A-16
1-4 Configuration , 4-14 flexible shaf , 6-8
5DRST , 5-2 continuous loop review , 1-4 Flow Processor , A-17
5ERST , 5-2 Control Panel , 1-5 Footswitch , 2-5
5KRST , 5-2 cracks , 6-7 Frame Table bus , A-10
Front End , A-12
A D Front End Control , A-14
AC Input , 2-1 default presets , 1-9 function keys , 1-5
AC Internal, 2-1 Delay lines , A-13 Functional Block Diagram , 3-30
Accessories , 8-2 Depth , 3-9 fuse , 3-6
accessories, 8-1 Diagnostic Tests , 3-6 Fuses , 8-19
Acoustic Power, Dimensions , 2-1
G
2-8
Acoustic Quantification , A-18 Doppler , 1-4
Air Filters , 3-3 Doppler Detector , A-14 Graphics , A-15
air filters , 1-1 , 6-6 Doppler Processor , A-16 Ground Impedance , 6-12
, Doppler Transducers , 2-3
H
air vent 6-6
AQ , 2-6 Dot Test , 4-18
AQ data , 1-4 Dot Tests , 4-16 hardcopy , 4-24
AQUASONIC 100 (TM) , 4-19 DRST ,

, 5D-1 5-2 hardware components , 1-3
architecture , A-1 DSR - SCSI, A-17 headphone output , 1-5
, HeartSound , 1-5
E
Assembly/Disassembly 3A-1
Audio , 2-5 hooks , 4-1
Audio path , A-17 E-Box , 1-4 , 3-3 hotkey , 4-8
, E-Box Switches , 3-18
I
auxiliary 1-5
ECG module , 1-5
B EEPROM Interface , A-11 I/O interface. , A-1
B/W Continuous Loop Review , A-20 EL , 3A-16 Image Centering , 3A-6

Backup PRESETS , 4-29 Electrical Safety , 6-11 Image Detector , A-13
Basic , 4-14 Electrical Static Discharge , 6-4 Image Memory, A-19
Basic Test , 4-6 Electroluminescent , 1-5 Image Position, 3A-6
Battery , 8-19 Environmental , 2-1 Instrument Exchange, 3-1
Battery charging , A-15 Erase Log , 4-28 Interactive RST , 4-11
battery-backed RAM , 4-30 Error codes , 5-1 internal cables, 7-1
benefits , 1-1 ERST ,

, 5E-1 5-2 isolated ac, 1-4
block diagram , A-1 ESD guidelines, 6-4 isolation , 1-3, 1-4
Brake , 3A-18 Exchange, 3-1 isolation transformer, 7-7
, exchange, 3-5
K
brake replacement 3A-20
Brightness/Contrast , 3A-2 Exchange PCB's, 8-13
Extended Basic, 4-6, 4-14 Keyboard Control , A-3
C Extended basic, 4-13 Keyboard Processor , 4-1
Calibration , 4-30 external cables, 7-1 Keyprocessor Electronics , , 3-3

1-5
, Keyscanner , 5-1
F
Cart 1-3
Cart Wiring , 7-7 Kowa TLR - 111 , 1-8
Chamois , 6-9 Factory Basic , 4-6 , 4-11, 4-14 KRST , 5-2 , 5K-1
, Fan Control , 3-16
L
Circuit Breaker 3A-12
circuit breakers , 8-29 fan control , 3-17
cleaning , 6-1 Fan Replacement , 3A-14 Language Options , 8-27
Clock generation , A-11 features , 1-1 Languages , 2-7
CMOS , 4-29 Filter Cleaning utility , 4-31 LEDs , 5-2
Coarse Delays , A-13 Fine focusing , A-12 LEDs , 4-21
Color Continuous Loop Review , A-20 fixed axle , 1-3 Line Frequency , 2-7
Color flow , A-16 Fixed wheels , 1-3 Line Timer bus , A-10
Color Monitor , 1-4 , 3A-1 Flash Card , 3-24 Line Voltage , 2-7
Index - 1
Index
Line voltage , 3-5 power cord , 3-5 Saline Solution , 6-18
Line Voltage Conversion , 3-15 power cords, 8-29 Scan Converter , 1-4 , 5-1
List Boxes , 4-9 power Index , 1-10 Scanner , 1-4 , 5-1
Load , 2-1 Power Supply , 1-3 , 2-7, 3-3 Scanner I/O , A-16
Logs , 4-26 Power Trunk cables , 7-9 sensor surfaces , 6-9
Lucite , 4-18 Preset , 1-1 sensors. , 6-10
Preset Functionality , 1-9 Serial Number , 8-1

M Preset system settings , 1-1 Service Access , 3-3
Main Display , 2-1 Presets , 1-9 slide pots , 1-5
Main Screen , 4-1 presets , 1-9 SMO/PCE Parts , 8-5
Main Test Menu , 4-11 preventive maintenance , 6-1 , 6-11 Soft touch panels , 1-1
Mechanical Index , 1-10 Programming , 3-24 software , 1-1
menu , 4-8 Progress Boxes , 4-10 Sony UP 860 - Small, 1-8
metric , 3-2 Pulse, 1-5 Sony UP 870 - Small, 1-8
Microphone , 2-5 PV Power Supply , A-15 Sony UP 910 - Large, 1-8
Miscellaneous Parts , 8-19 Sony UP 910/P - Large , 1-8
M-Mode , 1-4 , 1-5, A-16 Q Sony UP3000 , 1-8
M-mode/spectral memory , A-19 Q1C Test Point , 3-15 Sony UP3000P , 1-8
Module , 4-6 QWERTY , A-3 Sony UP5000 , 1-8
Monitor Adjustments , 3A-6 Sony UP5000MD , 1-8
Monitor Removal , 3A-1 R Sony UP5000P , 1-8
Moving , 1-11 R wave , 1-5 Speakers , 2-5
multielement , 6-7 Raster Format , 2-1 Specification , 2-1
Received signal processing , A-12 spectral , 1-5
N Regulatory Compliance , 2-7 Spectral path , A-17
NEMA strip , 2-1 Repair , 3-1 Stand Alone Basic , 4-12, 4-13
Repair Philosophy , 3-1 Stripchart Board , A-19
O replacement parts, 8-1 Stripchart board , A-19
OEM Instrument Exchange , 8-10 Resident Self Test, 1-1, 4-1 Stripchart Tests, 4-31
OEM peripheral , 1-4 Resident Self Test Errors, 5-1 struts, 1-3
Optical Disc , 1-8 Respiration, 1-5 Submodule, 4-7
Option Buttons , 4-10 Restore PRESETS, 4-29 Subsystem , 4-7
overlay , A-4 RETMA , 1-3 Suplies, 8-2
RGB color, 1-4 supplies, 8-1
P Ripple, 2-7 SVHS Tape, 8-3
Panasonic - 7300 , 1-9 rotary controls, 1-5 Swelling, 6-7
Panasonic - 7330E , 1-9 RS232, A-9 Switch Settings, 3-18
Panasonic - 7350 , 1-9 RST , 4-1, 5-1 Swivel wheel, 1-3
Panasonic - 7350E , 1-9 RST error, 4-21 Swivel wheels, 1-3
Parts Ordering , 8-1 RST Error Log, 4-13, 4-26 system cabling, 7-1
Patient Cable , 8-2 RST screens, 4-1 System Chronometer utility, 4-31
PC board allocation , 8-13 R-Theta, A-18 System Components, 1-8
PCB Switches , 3-22 Run Time Error Log, 4-27 System Description , 1-3
Performance Assurance , 6-1 Run Time Errors, 4-7, 5-1 System Information Screen , 4-25
Peripheral , 2-6
Peripheral Maintenance , 6-9 S T

peripherals , 1-1 SAE (Amenican thread) , 3-2 Tap Coefficient bus , A-10
Phantom , 3-2 Safety , 2-7 Tectrol , 3-5
Physio Amplifier , 1-5 Safety Analyzer , 6-11 TEE Imaging , 6-16
Physio memory , A-19 Safety checks , 6-1 TEE safety , A-14
physio setup screen , 1-5 Safety Regulations , 2-7 Temperature sensing , A-15
Physio/Video/Timing , A-19 Safety Testing , 6-16 temperature sensors , 3-16
Physios , 2-4 Saline , 6-17 test blocks , 3-2
Index - 2
Index
Test Interpretation , 4-20
Test Patterns , 4-23
test points , 3-6
TGC control , A-11
TGC gain (front) , A-12
Theory of Operation , A-1
Thermal Index , 1-10
Tilt-Swivel , 3A-8
torque setting , 3-4
Torx Screwdrivers , 3A-2 , 3A-8

Touch Panel Calibration , 4-30
touch screen , 3A-16
transducer cord , 3-3
Transducer Exchange , 8-5
Transducer Maintenance , 6-7
Transducer Parts/Accessories , 8-7
Transducer performance , 6-7
Transducer selection , A-11 , A-14

Transistor Plate , 3-17
transistor plate , 3-13
Transmit drive for transducer , A-12
Transmit Power , 1-10
transmit power , 1-10
Transmit Power Supply , A-14
Transmitter pulse , A-12
Transporting Vehicle , 1-11
troubleshooting , 4-1
trunk cables , 1-3
Twivel , 3A-8
Twivel Friction , 3A-11

twivel retainer , 3A-8
twivel washer , 3A-8
2D , 1-5
U
user intervention , 4-16
V
VCR housing , 1-3
VHS Tape , 8-3
Video , 2-5
Video display- , A-19
Video I/O , A-20
Video Tests , 4-30
voltage output , 3-6
Voltage Test Points , 3-9 , 3-10
W
Weight , 2-1
Wheel Lock , 1-1
Wheel Replacement , 3A-18
Wheels , 3A-18
Index - 3

M2406SMN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M2406SMN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

H

Recycling plays an important role in conserving natural Copyright © 1997

4 RST 5 Error Codes 5 KRST Codes 5 ERST Codes

5 DRST Codes 5 Run Time Codes 6 Preventive

8 Parts Lists and

Publication number for a particular purpose.

Warning Symbols Used in

Indicates potential for elec-

1 Introduction and General Information

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Preset Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Detailed Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Main Power Supply (Tectrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Imager Problems - Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Power Line Voltage Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

E-Box Fan Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

System Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Flash Card Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Battery-Backed RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

TEE Transducer Thermistor Measurement Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Functional Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Monitor Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1

Monitor Tilt-Swivel (Twivel) Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-8

Circuit Breaker Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-12

Main Supply Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-14

Touch Screens Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-16

Cart Wheels and Brake Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-18

4 RST - Description - Use

RST Menu Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

RST Definitions and Acronyms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Interface Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Test Modes - Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Test Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

User-Dependent Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Dot Tests - Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Processor Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

CMOS RAM (Presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Touch Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Video Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Video I/O A to D test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Stripchart Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Equipment Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Network Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Errors on LEDs during Stand Alone Basic Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5K KRST - Keyprocessor Electronics

5E ERST - Scanner Error Codes

5D DRST - Scan Converter Error Codes

5R Run Time Error Codes

Performance Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Transducer Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Peripheral Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Recommended Frequency of Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Safety and Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Transesophageal (TEE) Transducer Safety Testing.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Epiaortic Transducer Safety Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

7 Wiring & Cabling

Primary Cart Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

8 Parts Lists & Exploded Views

Monitor Tilt-Swivel (Twivel) Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-8

Errors on LEDs during Stand Alone Basic Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3